Estudio 452

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
Printing Guide
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS (UNLESS A SEPARATE
LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE SUPPLIER OF APPLICABLE SOFTWARE IN WHICH CASE
SUCH SEPARATE LICENSE SHALL APPLY). IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, YOU
MAY NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE, AND YOU MUST PROMPTLY RETURN THE
SOFTWARE TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT.
THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THIS PRODUCT INCLUDES NUMEROUS INDIVIDUAL

SOFTWARE COMPONENTS, EACH HAVING ITS OWN APPLICABLE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”). INFORMATION RELATING TO THE EULAS MAY BE FOUND IN AN
ELECTRONIC FILE INCLUDED ON THE USER DOCUMENTATION CD-ROM INCLUDED
HEREWITH; HOWEVER, ALL SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION DEVELOPED OR CRE-
ATED BY OR FOR TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION (“TTEC”) ARE PROPRIETARY PROD-
UCTS OF TTEC AND ARE PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT LAWS, INTERNATIONAL TREATY
PROVISIONS, AND OTHER APPLICABLE LAWS.
Grant of License
This is a legal agreement between you, the end-user (“You”), and TTEC and its suppliers. This
software, fonts (including their typefaces) and related documentation (“Software”) is licensed for
use with the system CPU on which it was installed (“System”) in accordance with the terms con-
tained in this Agreement. This Software is proprietary to TTEC and/or its suppliers.
TTEC and its suppliers disclaim responsibility for the installation and/or use of this Software, and
for the results obtained by using this Software. You may use one copy of the Software as
installed on a single System, and may not copy the Software for any reason except as neces-
sary to use the Software on a single System. Any copies of the Software shall be subject to the
conditions of this Agreement.
You may not, nor cause or permit any third party to, modify, adapt, merge, translate, reverse
compile, reverse assemble, or reverse engineer the Software. You may not use the Software,
except in accordance with this license. No title to the intellectual property in the Software is
transferred to you and full ownership is retained by TTEC or its suppliers. Source code of the
Software is not licensed to you. You will be held legally responsible for any copyright infringe-
ment, unauthorized transfer, reproduction or use of the Software or its documentation.
Term
This license is effective until terminated by TTEC or upon your failure to comply with any term of
this Agreement. Upon termination, you agree to destroy all copies of the Software and its docu-
mentation.
You may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and its documentation
and all copies.
Disclaimer of Warranty
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY RELATING TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. IF THE SOFTWARE PROVES
DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS) SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. TTEC
AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 3

ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN THAT IS PROVIDED BY TTEC AND ITS AFFILI-
ATES PURSUANT TO A EULA IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE (EXCEPT PERSONAL INJURY OR
DEATH RESULTING FROM NEGLIGENCE ON THE PART OF TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS),
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, LOST SAVINGS OR
OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, NOR FOR THIRD PARTY
CLAIMS.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights

The Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the
U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or (c) (i) (ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause set forth in 252.227-7013, or 52.227-19
(c) (2) of the DOD FAR, as appropriate. Contractor/Manufacturer is TOSHIBA TEC Corporation,
6-78, Minami-cho, Mishima-shi, Shizuoka-ken, 411-8520, Japan.
General
You may not sublicense, lease, rent, assign or transfer this license or the Software. Any attempt
to sublicense, lease, rent, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is
void. You agree that you do not intend to, and will not ship, transmit (directly or indirectly) the
Software, including any copies of the Software, or any technical data contained in the Software
or its media, or any direct product thereof, to any country or destination prohibited by the United
States Government. This license shall be governed by the laws of Japan or, at the election of a
Supplier of TTEC concerned with a dispute arising from or relating to this Agreement, the laws of
the Country designated from time to time by the relevant Supplier of TTEC. If any provision or
portion of this Agreement shall be found to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the remaining
provisions or portions shall remain in full force and effect.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT
YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE
COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TTEC AND ITS SUPPLI-
ERS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN,
OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS
LICENSE AGREEMENT.
TOSHIBA TEC Corporation, 6-78, Minami-cho, Mishima-shi, Shizuoka-ken, 411-8520, Japan.
4 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT
Trademarks
y The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.
y The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Me Operating System.
y The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.
y The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
y The official name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista Operating System.
y The official name of Windows Server 2003 is Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating
System.
y Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the brand names and product names of other
Microsoft products are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.
y Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, Mac, TrueType, and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc. in the US and other countries.
y Postscript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
y Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.
y IBM, AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
y NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks of Novell, Inc.
y Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respec-
tive companies.
Copyright
© 2005 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written
permission of TTEC. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the infor-
mation contained herein.
TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT 5

Preface
Thank you for purchasing e-STUDIO452 Series or e-STUDIO282 Series Multifunctional Digital
Systems. This guide provides instructions on how to set up your computer and print to the equip-
ment. Read this guide before printing to your e-STUDIO452 Series or e-STUDIO282 Series.
Keep this guide within easy reach, and use it to configure an environment that makes best use
of the e-STUDIO’s functions.
About This Guide

This manual describes how to install the user software for the printer functions, set up printing,
and manage print jobs from Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS, and UNIX computers.
For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the e-STUDIO452 Series or
e-STUDIO282 Series, see the Network Administration Guide. For general information on
using the copier, your computer, your application software, or your network, see the manuals
that accompany those products.
This manual applies the equipment that either the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed.
Conventions
y The term “this equipment” in this manual refers to the e-STUDIO452 Series or e-STUDIO282
Series.
y The term “e-Filing” in this manual is an abbreviation of “electronic filing”.
Lineup of Our Manuals

Thank you for purchasing the TOSHIBA multifunctional digital systems e-STUDIO452 Series or
e-STUDIO282 Series.
We have provided you with these manuals for the operation of this equipment. Select and read
the manual best suited to your needs.
Quick Start Guide
This Quick Start Guide describes the initial setup method of this equip-
ment and accessories of this product such as operator’s manuals and
CD-ROMs.
6 Preface
Operator’s Manual Basic Functions
This Operator’s Manual Basic Functions describes how to use the basic
functions of this equipment mainly focusing on the copying function.
Also this manual contains safety precautions for users to be observed.
Be sure to read it first carefully.
User Functions Guide

This User Functions Guide describes the functions and settings under
the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the control panel of this equipment.
Other guides are provided by the User Documentation CD-ROM in PDF files:
TopAccess Guide
This TopAccess Guide explains how to operate and set up the network
functions such as the network scanning function and job management,
using the TopAccess (Web-based utility) from client computers.
Preface 7
Network Administration Guide
This Network Administration Guide explains the guidelines for setting up
network servers to provide various network services, and troubleshoot-
ing for network administrators.
Printing Guide
This Printing Guide explains how to install the client software for printing
from Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS, and UNIX computers, and print
to the equipment.
Scanning Guide
This Scanning Guide explains how to operate the scanning function of
this equipment.
e-Filing Guide
This e-Filing Guide explains how to operate the e-Filing function using
the TWAIN driver, File Downloader and e-Filing web utility.
Network Fax Guide

This Network Fax Guide explains how to use the network fax function
that enable users to operate fax and internet fax sending from a client
computer via network.
8 Preface
User Management Guide
This User Management Guide describes how to manage this equipment
using the functions of “Department Management”, “User Management
Setting” and “User Authentication for Scan to E-mail”.
e-BRIDGE Viewer
The e-BRIDGE Viewer provides the functions to view and find the docu-
ments in e-Filing boxes on the TOSHIBA e-STUDIO MULTIFUNC-
TIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS from a client computer via TCP/IP
network, and also it can view and find the files in your computer.
To read manuals in PDF (Portable Document Format) files

Viewing and printing this operator’s manual in PDF files require that you install Adobe Reader or
Adobe Acrobat Reader on your PC. If Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed
on your PC, download and install it from the website of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Preface 9
Precautions in this manual
To ensure correct and safe use of this equipment, this operator’s manual describes safety pre-
cautions according to the three levels shown below.
You should fully understand the meaning and importance of these items before reading this
manual.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

in death, serious injury, or serious damage, or fire in the equipment or sur-
rounding assets.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

minor or moderate injury, partial damage of the equipment or surrounding
assets, or loss of data.
Indicates a procedure you should follow to ensure the optimal performance of

the equipment and problem-free copying.
Other than the above, this manual also describes information that may be useful for the opera-
tion of this equipment with the following signage:
Describes handy information that is useful to know when operating the equip-
ment.
Pages describing items related to what you are currently doing. See these
pages as required.
10 Preface
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ..........................................................3
TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT ...............................................................5
Preface...........................................................................................................6
Chapter 1 Overview
Features and Functions .............................................................................16

About the Client CD-ROM .......................................................................... 17
For Windows............................................................................................17
For Macintosh..........................................................................................18
For UNIX..................................................................................................18
Chapter 2 Installing Client Software for Windows
About the Installation.................................................................................20

About Client Software for Windows .........................................................20
Planning for Installation ...........................................................................20
Installing Client Software for USB Printing..............................................27
Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play.........................................27
Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing ............................. 38
Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer.......................38
Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard.................51
Installing Client Software for SMB Printing ............................................. 64
Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer ......................................64
Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print.......................................71
Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard ................................75
Installing Client Software for IPP Printing ...............................................92
Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard ..................................92
Installing Client Software for Novell Printing ........................................105
Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer ..................................105
Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print...................................112
Installing Client Software for Web Services Print .................................120
Installing Client Software for Novell iPrint.............................................126
Installing Client Software from TopAccess ...........................................127
Uninstalling Client Utilities Software......................................................129
When Installed Using the Installer .........................................................129
When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard .............................................134
Repairing Client Software........................................................................137
TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
Chapter 3 Installing Client Software for Macintosh
About the Installation...............................................................................140

About Client Software for Macintosh .....................................................140
Planning for Installation .........................................................................140
Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x..............141
Installing the Macintosh PPD File..........................................................141
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.x .........................................144
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x .........157
Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x .................................................168
Installing the Macintosh PPD File..........................................................168
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x............................................168
Chapter 4 Installing Client Software for UNIX
Setting Up the UNIX Filters......................................................................178

About UNIX Filters.................................................................................178
System Requirements ...........................................................................178
Configuring UNIX Printing Using UNIX Filters.......................................179
Setting Up the CUPS ................................................................................187
About CUPS ..........................................................................................187
Configuring UNIX Printing Using CUPS ................................................187
Chapter 5 Printing from Windows
Before Using the Printer Driver...............................................................206

Configuring the Options.........................................................................206
Setting the Department Code ................................................................211
Copying the PPD File for Windows .......................................................213
Printing from Application ........................................................................214
Considerations and Limitations .............................................................214
How to Print ...........................................................................................214
Setting Up Print Options..........................................................................217
How to Setup .........................................................................................217
Print Options..........................................................................................221
Printing with Extended Print Functionality ............................................249
Printing Various Print Job Types ...........................................................249
Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options ..............................256
12 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 6 Printing from Macintosh
Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x .....276

How to Print from Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x ......................276
Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x ...............277
Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.3.x to Mac OS X 10.4.x...........................278
Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.x...........................................................292
Printing from Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x ....................................304
How to Print from Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x.....................................................304
Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x..................................................305
Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x .............................................................306
Chapter 7 Printing from UNIX
Printing from an Application ...................................................................322

Printing Using LP Command .................................................................322
Generic “lp” and “lptap” Options ............................................................322
General Options ....................................................................................323
PCL5e Specific Options.........................................................................333
Chapter 8 Other Printing Methods
FTP Printing ..............................................................................................338

Email Printing ...........................................................................................340
Chapter 9 Monitoring Print Jobs
Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon ....................................342

Features and Functions.........................................................................342
How to Use TopAccessDocMon............................................................342
Monitoring the Printer ............................................................................348
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
When Printing cannot be Performed ......................................................370

Printer Driver Errors.................................................................................371
Printer Driver Installation Error Messages.............................................371
Printer Driver General Errors.................................................................372
TopAccessDocMon Errors ......................................................................375
TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions ....................................................375
TopAccessDocMon Error Messages .....................................................376
TABLE OF CONTENTS 13
Device Status Indicators........................................................................382
Chapter 11 Appendix
Managing Fonts with Font Manager .......................................................386

Installing Font Manager .........................................................................386
Searching Fonts ....................................................................................386
Installing Fonts in Windows ...................................................................386
Uninstalling Fonts in Windows...............................................................387
Removing Fonts from the Computer .....................................................387
Displaying Font Preview ........................................................................387
Creating a Font Group...........................................................................388
Sorting Fonts in the List.........................................................................388
Internal Fonts List ....................................................................................390
Internal PCL Fonts List ..........................................................................390
Internal PS Fonts List ............................................................................391
INDEX .......................................................................................................................................393
14 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Overview
1.
This section describes the overview of the printing functions.
Features and Functions .........................................................................................16

About the Client CD-ROM ......................................................................................17
For Windows .....................................................................................................................................17
For Macintosh ...................................................................................................................................18
For UNIX ...........................................................................................................................................18
1 Overview
Features and Functions
The printing features are available only when the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed.
Extensive Client Platform Support

This equipment supports printing from IBM-compatible PC, Macintosh, and UNIX workstations.
Not all features are supported on all platforms, however.
Various Port Options

You can map this equipment to print to a SMB, IPP, Raw TCP, or LPR port.
Multiple Job Types

Job Types refer to the way this equipment handles a print job.
y Normal mode requires no special handling and is the most frequently used printing mode.
y Scheduled Print lets you specify the time and date at which to print a job.
y Private Print mode allows you to hold a job in the print queue until you enter a password at
the copier touch panel to print the job.
y Proof Print mode prints the first copy of a multi-copy job then awaits your approval before
printing the remaining copies.
y Store to e-Filing mode allows you to store the printed document in e-Filing.
y Overlay File prints a document element, such as text or graphics, to a file for superimposing
on the background of other documents.
Professional Finishing Options

Depending on the type of finishing units you have installed on this equipment, you can choose to
sort, group, fold and staple your documents (including saddle-stitching) and punch binding
holes.
Sophisticated Document Layout and Assembly Options

You can choose whether to print your document as you have set it up in the application, or to
impose printer-driven document layout options such as printing in Book Format or printing Multi-
ple Pages per Sheet.
Additionally, the printer drivers provide the ability to print selected pages on different media. This
includes printing front and back covers, inserting sheets at predefined positions within the docu-
ment, or interleaving pages so that every other page is inserted blank or printed on a different
type of media.
Watermark and Image Overlay Support

Watermarks are a great way to subtly convey useful information about your printed documents.
Common watermarks are “Confidential,” “Draft,” and “Original.” Several watermarks have been
pre-defined for use with your documents, or you can create and save your own custom water-
marks.
Watermarks consist of text. Image Overlays can be any combination of text, graphics or other
document elements.
Printing watermarks consumes fewer resources than using Image Overlays, so you should use
watermarks wherever possible, particularly when printing speed is an issue.
16 Features and Functions

About the Client CD-ROM
For Windows
The contents of the Client Utilities CD-ROM:
Client Software Installer

y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\setup.exe
This is the setup program to install the printer drivers, and TopAccessDocMon on your com-
puter.
The Font Manager is provided in the Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner
Kit.
PCL6 Printer Drivers

y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 98/Me for each
language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows NT 4.0 for each
language version by Add Printer Wizard.
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PCL6\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003/Vista for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\XP_VISTA_X64\PCL6\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows XP/Vista/x64
for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
PS3 Printer Drivers (PostScript)

y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 98/Me for each
language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows NT 4.0 for each
language version by Add Printer Wizard.
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PS\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 2000/XP/Vista
for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\XP_VISTA_X64\PS\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows XP/Vista/x64 for
each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
Printer Driver Setup files (Zip Compressed)

y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\PandP\<language>\
This includes the compressed zip files that contain the setup files to install each printer driver
for each language version.
Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter.
P.20 “About Client Software for Windows”
About the Client CD-ROM 17

1 Overview
For Macintosh
Macintosh PPD files

y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:Client:MacPPD:OS9:<language>
This includes the PPD file for Apple LaserWriter8 to enable printing from Macintosh on the
Mac OS 8.6, Mac OS 9.x, and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic Mode
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:Client:MacPPD:OSX
This includes the PPD file to enable printing from Macintosh on the Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac
OS X 10.4.x.
Further information about user software for Macintosh is described in next chapter.
P.140 “About Client Software for Macintosh”
For UNIX
Solaris Filter
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/SolarisFilter/Usa/
This includes the Tar file for Solaris v2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9.
HP-UX Filter
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/HP-UXFilter/Usa/
This includes the Tar file for HP-UX ver.10.20/11.x.
AIX Filter
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/AIXFilter/Usa/
This includes the Tar file for AIX 4.3.3.
Linux Filter
y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/LinuxFilter/Usa/
This includes the Tar file for Red Hat 7.x/8.x/9.x, Red Hat Enterprise WS2, SuSE Linux 7.x/
8.x/9.x, Mandrake Linux 7.x/8.x/9.x and Turbo Linux 8/10.
SCO UNIX Filter

y [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/OpenUnixFilter/Usa/
This includes the Tar file for SCO UnixWare 7 and SCO OpenUNIX 8.
Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter.
P.178 “About UNIX Filters”
18 About the Client CD-ROM

Installing Client Software for Windows
2.
This section describes the instructions on how to install the client software on Windows.
About the Installation .............................................................................................20

About Client Software for Windows...................................................................................................20
Planning for Installation.....................................................................................................................20
Installing Client Software for USB Printing ..........................................................27

Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play ..................................................................................27
Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing ..........................................38

Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer ................................................................38
Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard ..........................................................51
Installing Client Software for SMB Printing..........................................................64

Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer ................................................................................64
Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print ................................................................................71
Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard..........................................................................75
Installing Client Software for IPP Printing ............................................................92

Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard............................................................................92
Installing Client Software for Novell Printing .....................................................105

Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer ............................................................................105
Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print ............................................................................ 112
Installing Client Software for Web Services Print..............................................120

Installing Client Software from TopAccess ........................................................127
Uninstalling Client Utilities Software ..................................................................129
When Installed Using the Installer...................................................................................................129
When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard .......................................................................................134
Repairing Client Software ....................................................................................137

2 Installing Client Software for Windows
About the Installation

About Client Software for Windows
Printer Drivers
Printer drivers are software components that enable application programs to interact with the
printer. The e-STUDIO452 Series or e-STUDIO282 Series comes with two printer drivers, PCL6
and PS3 (PostScript) printer drivers. These printer drivers offer document print, layout and
assembly functions that are not available with many applications.
TopAccessDocMon
This utility allows you to monitor all jobs and control your own current jobs. With the notification
feature enabled, TopAccessDocMon informs you of copier or printing events, such as paper-out
or drawer open, before you walk to the copier to find your job incomplete or unsuccessful.
Font Manager
This utility allows you to install and manage the TrueType fonts that are corresponding to the
internal PS fonts on the equipment.
Font Manager is separately provided in the Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or
Printer/Scanner Kit.
There is another job monitoring utility, TopAccess, which allows you to monitor and manage your
print jobs over the Internet using either Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer. Because
TopAccess is an embedded web-based device and job management tool it does not require your
installation.
Planning for Installation

This section will help you to plan an installation suited to your environment. Before installing the
client software, read this section.
Before Installing Client Software

Before installing the client software, confirm the followings to perform an appropriate installation.
— When Same Printer Drivers Have Been Installed Previously

Before updating the printer drivers, please delete the existing printer drivers.
— When GL-DocMon Has Been Installed Previously

If the GL-DocMon for GL-1010 or GL-1020 has been installed, uninstall the GL-DocMon prior to
installing the TopAccessDocMon. TopAccessDocMon can be used to monitor the GL-1010 and
GL-1020 controller.
20 About the Installation

— When TopAccessDocMon Has Been Installed Previously
If the TopAccessDocMon have been installed from other e-STUDIO Client Utilities CD-ROM,
uninstall the TopAccessDocMon then install them from the e-STUDIO452 Series or e-
STUDIO282 Series Client Utilities CD-ROM. TopAccessDocMon can be used for e-
STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO452 Series, e-
STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series.
When you uninstall the TopAccessDocMon, please click [No] at the dialog box that displays the
message to delete the settings for the TopAccessDocMon so that you can restore the settings
after installing new one.
Type of Printer Drivers

y PCL6 Printer Driver — for printing documents from general applications such as Microsoft
Office.
y PS3 Printer Driver — for printing documents from graphical application such as Adobe Illus-
trator as well as general applications such as Microsoft Office.
System Requirements
To install the printer drivers and other client software on a Windows workstation, the following is
required.
y Display Resolution
1024 x 768 dots or more
y Display Color
High Color (16bit) or higher is recommended
y CPU
Pentium 133 MHz minimum (Pentium 266 MHz or faster recommended)
y Memory
64MB for Windows 98
96MB for Windows Me and Windows NT 4.0
128MB for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
The applicable computers depend on the printing systems:

y Raw TCP/LPR Printing
Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Windows XP Service Pack 1/Service Pack 2
Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1
Windows Vista
y SMB Printing
Windows 98 (Windows 98 Second Edition Recommended)
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a
Windows Vista
y IPP Printing
Windows Vista
About the Installation 21

About Installation Procedure

Please find the installation procedure suited to your environment from the following:
P.22 “USB Connection”
P.22 “Local Area Network over TCP/IP”
P.24 “Internet Connection”
P.25 “Novell Printing”
— USB Connection
Available for: Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Win-
dows Vista
Connecting with USB
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Setting up the USB Printer Windows Server 2003
Connection Windows Vista
This equipment supports the Full Speed connection. When this equipment is connected to your
computer with the USB cable, you must install the printer drivers using the Windows Plug and
Play functions.
P.27 “Installing Client Software for USB Printing”
— Local Area Network over TCP/IP

When this equipment is connected to your computer in the local area network over TCP/IP, vari-
ous printing methods are available such as:
y Raw TCP/LPR Printing (only available for Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista)
y SMB Printing
Some of them are applicable to your environments, the printing methods generally recom-
mended are decided by the Windows version.
y Windows 98, Windows Me — SMB Printing
y Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista —
Raw TCP/LPR Printing
If you have no advance instruction for an installation from your administrator, check these print-
ing methods whether they are suited to your network environments.
It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista as a print server, it is recom-
mended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further information about setting up
printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.

You can also perform FTP printing over the TCP/IP network. For more information about FTP
printing, please refer to the following section.
P.338 “FTP Printing”
Raw TCP/LPR Printing

Available for: Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Vista
Connecting over TCP/IP Network
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Setting up the Raw TCP Windows Vista
or LPR printer connection
This equipment allows you to connect using Raw TCP or LPR which is available for Windows
NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista. If you use
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, Raw TCP/LPR print-
ing may be most suitable.
P.38 “Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing”
y To print with a Raw TCP connection, this equipment must be configured to enable Raw TCP
Print Service. Ask your administrator if the Raw TCP Print Service is enabled.
y To print with a LPR connection, this equipment must be configured to enable LPD Print Ser-
vice. Ask your administrator if the LPD Print Service is enabled.
SMB Printing
Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows
XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista
Network Environment over TCP/IP
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Setting up SMB Printer Windows XP
Connection Windows Server 2003
Windows Vista

This equipment can be used with an SMB printer connection that allows you to connect to this
equipment using File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks service. SMB printing is the
common method used to set up the printer. However, SMB printing is not suitable for printing a
large amount of documents.
P.64 “Installing Client Software for SMB Printing”
— Internet Connection
Available for: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista
Connecting over Internet
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows Vista
Setting up the IPP
printer connection
If you print to this equipment over the Internet, you can use IPP printing under Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista. This allows you to print to this equip-
ment from anywhere on the Internet.
P.92 “Installing Client Software for IPP Printing”
y To print with an IPP connection, this equipment must be configured to enable the IPP Print
Service and must be connected to the Internet. Ask your administrator if the IPP Print Ser-
vice is enabled.
y You can also perform Email printing over the Internet. For more information about Email
printing, please refer to the following section.
P.340 “Email Printing”

— Novell Printing
Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Connecting with a NetWare Environment over TCP/IP or IPX/SPX Network
NetWare 5.1
NetWare 6.0
NetWare 6.5
Setting up the Novell
printer connection
Setting up the SMB

printer connection
to Novell print queue
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
When this equipment is configured to manage printing with NetWare 5.1/6.0/6.5 over TCP/IP or
IPX/SPX, you can print through the NetWare print server from Windows 98/Me, Windows NT
4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. In this case, install the printer
driver and set up the SMB printer connection to a print queue created in the NetWare server.
P.105 “Installing Client Software for Novell Printing”
To print with a Novell connection, the NetWare server must be configured for printing and this
equipment must be configured to enable NetWare Print Service.

— Novell iPrint
Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Connecting with a Novell iPrint Environment over TCP/IP Network
NetWare 6.0
NetWare 6.5
Setting up the Novell

iPrint connection
Setting up the iPrint

printer connection
using iPrint Client
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
When this equipment is configured to manage iPrint with NetWare 6.0/6.5 over TCP/IP, you can
print through the NetWare print server from Windows 98/Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. In this case, install the printer driver using iPrint Client
from the NetWare server.
P.120 “Installing Client Software for Web Services Print”
To print with a Novell iPrint, the NetWare server must be configured for iPrint and this equipment
must be configured to enable NetWare Print Service.

Installing Client Software for USB Printing
This section describes how to set up the printer drivers when this equipment is connected with
USB cable.
To set up the printer drivers for USB printing, you must install the printer drivers by Plug and Play
functions instead of installing the client software using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-
ROM.
When this equipment is connected to a USB port of Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003 or Windows Vista computers, the Plug and Play Wizard automatically
starts. You can install a printer driver using this method but other client software cannot be
installed.
y TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is connected using only the USB
cable. However, when this equipment and your computer are connected to the local area
network and this equipment is connected to the USB port of your computer, you can use
TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs. To install TopAccessDocMon, you must install
it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
y The Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your com-
puter. To install the Font Manager, you must install it from the Font CD-ROM that comes with
the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.
P.386 “Installing Font Manager”
USB printing is not supported in Windows NT 4.0.
Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play

The procedure to install the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play differs depending on
the version of Windows used.
P.27 “Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista”
P.30 “Windows 2000”
P.33 “Windows Me”
Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista
Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play
The following describes an installation on Windows XP. The procedure is the same when Win-
dows Server 2003 or Windows Vista is used.
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users” privilege.
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” privilege when using Win-
dows XP/Server 2003/Vista.
1 Power on this equipment and your computer.
2 Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your computer.

y The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
Installing Client Software for USB Printing 27

3 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)" and click

[Next].
4 Select “Search for the best driver in these locations.” and check
only the “Include this location in the search” check box. Then click
[Browse].
y The Browse For Folder dialog box appears.
5 Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

y When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically start.
Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.
28 Installing Client Software for USB Printing

6 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows XP/
Server 2003/Vista is located and click [OK].
y To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PCL6\<language>".
y To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PS\<language>".
When using Windows XP x64 or Windows Vista x64, select the following folder.
- To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\XP_VISTA_X64\PCL6\<language>".
- To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\XP_VISTA_X64\PS\<language>".
7 Click [Next].
y It starts copying files.

8 Click [Finish].
9 The installation is completed.
Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.206 “Before Using the Printer Driver”
Windows 2000
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users” privilege
when using Windows 2000.

y The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
3 Click [Next].

4 Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)"
and click [Next].

6 Select only “Specify a location” and click [Next].
7 Click [Browse].
y The Locate File dialog box appears.

8 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000 is
located, select a inf file, and click [Open].

9 Click [OK].
10 Check [Next].
y It starts copying files.

11 Click [Finish].
Windows Me


y The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

4 Select “Automatic search for a better driver (Recommended)” and

click [Next].
y It starts searching the USB driver. When the USB port driver is found in the Client
Utilities CD-ROM, it automatically installs the USB port driver.
If the USB port driver cannot be installed automatically, click [Back] in the displayed dia-
log box, make sure the Client Utilities CD-ROM is inserted in the CD-ROM drive, and
then click [Next] to install the USB port driver again.
5 Click [Finish].
6 Click [Next].

7 Select "Search for the best driver for your device (Recommended)"
and click [Next].
8 Check only the “Specify a location” check box and click [Browse].
y The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
9 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/Me is
located and click [OK].

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>".

10 Click [Next].
11 Click [Next].
12 Change the name if desired and click [Next].
If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as a
default printer.

13 Select "Yes (recommended)" to print a test page and click [Finish].
y Start copying files.
14 Make sure the test page is successfully printed and click [Yes].
15 Click [Finish].

Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing

This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for Raw TCP/LPR printing which is avail-
able for the local area network over TCP/IP.
There are Two ways to set up the printer drivers for Raw TCP/LPR printing:
y Using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM
You can set up the printer drivers for Raw TCP/LPR printing by installing the printer drivers
using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM. Then you install and configure the Raw
TCP or LPR port to configure the connection.
P.38 “Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer”
y Using Add Printer Wizard
When you want to install the printer drivers without using the installer, or when you want to
install the same printer driver for another equipment, install the printer drivers using the Add
Printer Wizard.
P.51 “Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard”
y Before operating the following setup, check with your system administrator to make sure of
the following:
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.
y Raw TCP Printing is only available for Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,
and Windows Vista.
y LPR Printing is only available for Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows Vista.
Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer

Install the client software using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM first, then configure
the Raw TCP or LPR port in each printer driver.
Installing the client software for Raw TCP/LPR printing using the installer
The following describes an installation on Windows XP. The procedure is the same when other
versions of Windows are used.
y You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users” privi-
lege. You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” privilege when
using Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista.
y Only users with the administrator privilege can perform this on Windows Vista.For users
without the administrator privilege, installation on Windows Vista is possible by performing
the following procedure and having the administrator privilege temporarily.
- Select “Open folder to view files” in the AutoPlay menu and click [OK].
- Open the Client folder, click “Setup.exe” and then select “Run as administrator”.
- Enter the administrator's password of the client computer to operate with an administra-
tor's privilege and click [OK].

y The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language dialog box
appears.
y If the installer does not automatically start, double-click “Setup.exe” in the Client Utili-
ties CD-ROM.
38 Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing

2 Select your language and click [OK].
y The License Agreement screen is displayed.
3 Select “I accept the terms of the license agreement” and click

[Next].
y The Setup Type screen is displayed.
4 Select “Custom” and click [Next].
y The Select Components screen is displayed.
Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing 39

5 Check the software that you want to install and click [Next].
For e-STUDIO452 Series
TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.

TOSHIBA e-STUDIO452 Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer driver.
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO452 Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer driver.

y The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed.
y There are also Network Fax software, e-Filing software, and scan software in the list.
For more information about these software, please see the Network Fax Guide, e-
Filing Guide, and Scanning Guide.
y The Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts on your
computer. To install the Font Manager, you must install it from the Font CD-ROM that
comes with the Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit.

6 Click [Next].
y If you want to change the location where the programs are installed, click [Browse].
In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and click [OK].
y The Select Port screen is displayed.
If the following dialog box appears, click [Continue] to proceed the operation.
7 Select “Local Port” option and select “LPT1:” in the drop down
menu. Then click [Next].
y The Select Program Folder screen is displayed.

8 Click [Next].
y If you want to change the program folder, rename the folder in the “Program Folder”
field.
y Starts copying files and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed when
copying files are completed.
y When you select to install the N/W-Fax driver, the Digital Signature Not Found dialog
box appears while copying files. Click [Yes] to continue the installation.
y If the following message appears, click [Yes] to set the indicated printer driver to be
the default printer driver, or click [No] to not change the default printer driver.
9 Click [Finish].
y If you selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation, the system may
ask whether you want to view the Readme file and launch TopAccessDocMon.
The Installer may ask you to restart your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to
restart my computer now.” and click [Finish] to restart your computer.

10 Continue to configure the Raw TCP or LPR port.
The procedure to configure the Raw TCP or LPR port differs depending on the version of
Windows used.
P.43 “Configuring the Raw TCP/LPR port for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista”
P.48 “Configuring the LPR port for Windows NT 4.0”
Configuring the Raw TCP/LPR port for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
After you install the client software using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM, create the
Raw TCP or LPR port.
dows 2000, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista is used.
For instructions on how to install the client software, see the following section.
P.38 “Installing the client software for Raw TCP/LPR printing using the installer”
1 After installing the client software, click [Start] and click [Printers
and Faxes] to open the Printers and Faxes folder.
y If you are using the Windows 2000, click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers]
to open the Printers folder.
y If you are using the Windows Vista, click [Start], select [Control Panel], and click
[Printers] under [Hardware and Sound] to open the Printers folder.

2 Select the printer driver and select [Properties] in the [File] menu.
y The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

y When using Windows Vista, click the [Delete] in the Organize tab.
3 Display the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port...].
y The Printer Ports dialog box appears.
4 Select “Standard TCP/IP Port” and click [New Port...].
y The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.

5 Click [Next].
6 Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Printer Name or IP

Address” field and click [Next].
y If your network uses a DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this equipment
provided from DNS or WINS in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
y In the “Port Name” field, the port name is automatically entered according to the IP
address or DNS name entered in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
y When using Windows Vista, enter the IP address of this equipment in the “host name
or ip Address“ field and click [Next].
y The very first “IP_” is not displayed on Windows Vista.
7 Select “Standard” and click [Next].

When the LPD Print setting is enabled, you can also configure LPR printing. When you want to
configure LPR printing, follow the procedure below.
Select “Custom” and click [Settings...].
Select “LPR” at the “Protocol” option, enter “Print” in the “Queue Name” field at the
“LPR Settings” option, and then click [OK].
Click [Next].

8 Click [Finish].
y The screen returns to the Printer Ports dialog box.
9 Click [Close] to close the Printer Ports dialog box.
10 Make sure the created Raw TCP or LPR port is checked in the “Print
to the following port(s)” list and click [Close].

Configuring the LPR port for Windows NT 4.0
After you install the client software using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM, create the
LPR port.
For instructions on how to install the client software, see the following section.
P.38 “Installing the client software for Raw TCP/LPR printing using the installer”
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users” privilege
when using Windows NT 4.0.
1 After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Settings],

and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.

3 Display the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port...].
4 Select “LPR Port” and click [New Port...].
y The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears.
If “LPR Port” is not listed, make sure the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed on your Win-
dows NT 4.0. “LPR Port” is not listed unless the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed.
5 Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Name or address of

server providing lpd” field and “Print” in the “Name of printer or
print queue on that server” field, and click [OK].
y When your network uses DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this equip-
ment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Name or address of server providing lpd”
field.

7 Make sure the created LPR port is checked in the “Print to the fol-
lowing port(s)” list and click [OK] to save settings.

Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard
The procedure to install the printer driver for Raw TCP/LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard dif-
fers depending on the version of the Windows being used.
P.51 “Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista”
P.59 “Windows NT 4.0”
y TopAccessDocMon is also available for Raw TCP/LPR printing. To install TopAccessDoc-

Mon, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
Installing the printer driver for Raw TCP/LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard
dows 2000, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista is used.
1 After installing the client software, click [Start] and click [Printers
and Faxes] to open the Printers and Faxes folder.

2 Click the [Add a printer] in the Printer Tasks menu.
y When using the Windows 2000, double-click [Add Printer] icon.

y The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.
y When using the Windows Vista, Add Printer dialog box appears.
3 Click [Next].
4 Select “Local printer attached to this computer”, uncheck the

“Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer”, and
click [Next].
y When using the Windows Vista, select “Add a local printer“ and click [Next].

5 Select “Create a new port” and select “Standard TCP/IP Port” in the
“Type of port” drop down menu. Then click [Next].
y The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.
6 Click [Next].
7 Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Printer Name or IP

Address” field and click [Next].
provided from DNS or WINS in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
y In the “Port Name” field, the port name is automatically entered according to the IP
address or DNS name entered in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
y When using Windows Vista, enter the IP address of this equipment in the “host name
or ip Address“ field and click [Next].
y The very first “IP“ is not displayed on Windows Vista.

8 Select “Standard” and click [Next].
When the LPD Print setting is enabled, you can also configure LPR printing. When you want to
configure LPR printing, follow the procedure below.
Select “Custom” and click [Settings...].
Select “LPR” at the “Protocol” option, enter “Print” in the “Queue Name” field at the
“LPR Settings” option, and then click [OK].

Click [Next].
9 Click [Finish].
10 Click [Have Disk...].
y The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

11 Click [Browse...].

13 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003 is located and click [Open].

14 Click [OK].

15 Select the printer driver and click [Next].
If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it appears,
select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].
default printer.

17 Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].
18 Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].
19 Click [Finish].

Windows NT 4.0
Installing the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard
You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users” priv-
ilege.
1 Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the Print-
ers folder.
2 Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
3 Select “My Computer” and click [Next].

4 Click [Add Port...].
5 Select “LPR Port” and click [New Port...].
y The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears.
If “LPR Port” is not listed, make sure the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed on your Win-
dows NT 4.0. “LPR Port” is not listed unless the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed.
6 Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Name or address of

server providing lpd” field and “Print” in the “Name of printer or
print queue on that server” field, and click [OK].
y When your network uses DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this equip-
ment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Name or address of server providing lpd”
field.

8 Make sure that the created LPR Port is selected in the “Available
ports” list and click [Next].
y The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.
11 Click [Cancel].


13 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is
located and click [Open].

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>".
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>".
14 Click [OK].

default printer.
y When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer driv-
ers that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat the
procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating sys-
tems.

Installing Client Software for SMB Printing

This section describes how to set up the client software for SMB printing which is available for
the local area network over TCP/IP.
There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for SMB printing:
When you insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer automati-
cally starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer. If you
want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this method is convenient.
P.64 “Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer”
y Using Point and Print
You can install the printer driver by double-clicking network queues on the system. By this
method, printer drivers can be downloaded from the system so that the Client Utilities CD-
ROM is not required. However, other client software cannot be installed using this method.
P.71 “Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print”
y Using Add Printer Wizard
When you want to install the printer drivers without connecting to the equipment using Point
and Print, install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard.
P.75 “Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard”
Before installing the printer driver for SMB printing, check with your system administrator to
make sure of the following:
Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer

You can install the client software and set up the SMB printing using the installer in the Client
Utilities CD-ROM.
Installing the client software for SMB printing using the installer
using Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista.
y Only users with the administrator privilege can perform this on Windows Vista.For users
without the administrator privilege, installation on Windows Vista is possible by performing
the following procedure and having the administrator privilege temporarily.
- Select “Open folder to view files” in the AutoPlay menu and click [OK].
- Open the Client folder, click “Setup.exe” and then select “Run as administrator”.
- Enter the administrator's password of the client computer to operate with an administra-
tor's privilege and click [OK].
64 Installing Client Software for SMB Printing

appears.
ties CD-ROM.

[Next].
Installing Client Software for SMB Printing 65




6 Click [Next].

7 When the equipment is automatically found in the network, the

“Device on Network” option is selected and the found devices are
displayed in the list. Select the equipment that you want to connect
and click [Next].
y The Select Program Folder screen is displayed.
When the equipment is not automatically found in the network, the “Message” dialog box
appears. In that case, proceed the procedure below to select the network queue manu-
ally.
1. The “Message” dialog box appears, and click [Continue].
2. The Select Port screen is displayed, and click [Browse].

3. The Browse for Folder dialog box appears. Locate this equipment in your network,
select the “print” queue, and click [OK].
- Do not select “pcl6”, or “ps3” queue. These queues only accept the print job in
each emulation. If you install several printer drivers and specify one of these
queues, the print job may not be printed properly due to mismatch of the emula-
tions between the print job and queue.
4. Click [Next].

8 Click [Next].
field.
9 Click [Finish].

Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print

The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Point and Print differs depending
on the version of Windows used.
P.71 “Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista”
P.73 “Windows 98/Me”
It assumes using SMB printing by Point and Print in a small network. If you can use the Win-
dows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista as a print
server, it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further information
about setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.
y TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing. To install TopAccessDocMon, you

must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print

1 Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer, and

double-click a queue in which the printer driver should be installed
(see below).
pcl6 — Double-click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver.

ps3 — Double-click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver.
y When you are installing the printer driver on Windows Vista, the Printers dialog box
may appear. in the case, click [Installing driver].
y When you are installing the printer driver on Windows XP, the Connect to Printers dia-
log box may appear. In that case, click [Yes].
y When you are installing the printer driver on Windows 2000/NT 4.0, the Printers dia-
log box appears. In that case, click [Yes].
2 The printer driver is installed and the print queue window appears.

Windows 98/Me
Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print
1 Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer, and

double-click a queue in which the printer driver should be installed
(see below).
pcl6 — Double-click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver.

ps3 — Double-click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver.
y The Printers dialog box appears.
2 Click [Yes].
3 Select whether printing MS-DOS-based programs and click [Next].

4 Change the name if desired, select whether you are using this
printer as a default printer, and click [Next].
5 Select “Yes” to print a test page and click [Finish].
6 Make sure a test page is printed successfully and click [Yes] to

close the dialog box.

Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard
The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard differs depend-
ing on the version of the Windows being used.
P.75 “Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista”
P.81 “Windows NT 4.0”
y TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing. To install TopAccessDocMon, you

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard

1 Click [Start] and click [Printers and Faxes] to open the Printers and
Faxes folder.

y When using the Windows Vista, Add Printer dialog box appears.

3 Click [Next].
4 Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect and

install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].
y When using the Windows Vista, select “Add a local printer“ and click [Next].
5 Select “Create a new port” and select “Local Port” in the “Type of
port” drop down menu. Then click [Next].
y The Port Name dialog box appears.

6 Enter “\\<NetBIOS Name>\print” in the field and click [OK].
Example: NetBIOS Name = Mfp-04587704

\\Mfp-04587704\print
You can also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name.
Example: \\10.10.70.120\print


Server 2003/Vista is located and click [Open].

11 Click [OK].

default printer.

15 Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].
16 Click [Finish].
Windows NT 4.0
You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users” priv-
ilege.

ers folder.
3 Select “My Computer” and click [Next].
4 Click [Add Port...].

5 Select “Local Port” and click [New Port...].
Example: NetBIOS Name = Mfp-04998820

7 Click [Close].
8 Make sure the created port is selected and click [Next].

y The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.
11 Click [Cancel].

13 Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is
located and click [Open].

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>".
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>".

14 Click [OK].
default printer.

When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer drivers
that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat the proce-
dure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems.
Windows 98/Me
The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same when Win-
dows Me is used.

ers folder.
3 Click [Next].

4 Select “Local printer” and click [Next].
y The Open dialog box appears.



9 Click [OK].
11 Select “LPT1:” and click [Next].
default printer.

13 Select "No" and click [Finish].
14 The printer driver is installed and appears in the Printers folder.
16 Display the [Details] tab and click [Add Port...].
y The Add Port dialog box appears.

17 Select “Other” and “Local Port”, and click [OK].
Example: NetBIOS Name = MFP-04998820

19 Click [OK] to save settings.

Installing Client Software for IPP Printing

This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for IPP printing which is available for
Internet connection.
To set up the printer drivers for IPP printing, install the printer drivers by Add Printer Wizard, and
then install the other software that you require.
y Before installing the printer driver for IPP printing, check with your system administrator to
y IPP Printing is only available for Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows Vista.
Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard
Windows 2000/XP/Server2003
Installing the printer driver for IPP printing by Add Printer Wizard
dows 2000, Windows Server 2003 is used.
dows XP/Server 2003.
Faxes folder.
92 Installing Client Software for IPP Printing


3 Click [Next].
4 Select “Network printer” and click [Next].
Installing Client Software for IPP Printing 93

5 Select “Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office

network”, and enter “http://[IP address]:631/Print” in the “URL”
field.
y Enter the IP address of this equipment instead of [IP address].

Example: IP address = 10.10.70.120
http://10.10.70.120:631/Print
provided from DNS or WINS instead of [IP address].
Example: Print Server Name = Mfp-00c67861
http://Mfp-00c67861:631/Print
y When you connect from the Internet, enter the FQDN of this equipment provided from
DNS instead of [IP address].
Example: URL = mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com
http://mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com:631/Print
“P” for “Print” in the IPP URL must be capitalized. When you are using on Windows XP,
the IPP port can be created by entering “print” (non-capitalized) in the IPP URL, but the
print job cannot be sent to the equipment. In that case, delete the IPP port and then cre-
ate the IPP port correctly again.
y If an administrator has enabled the IPP Port80 Enabled option on this equipment, you
can exclude the port number from the URL. (i.e. “http://192.168.255.48/Print”)
y If an administrator has enabled the Enable SSL option for IPP Print, you must enter
“https://[IP address]:[SSL port number]/Print” in the “URL” field.
(i.e. “https://192.168.255.48:443/Print”)

6 Click [Next].
When the Authentication setting for IPP Print is enabled, the dialog box to enter a user
name and password appears. If this dialog box appears, enter the user name and pass-
word and click [OK]. For user name and password, please ask your administrator.


10 Locate the directory where the printer driver for your Windows ver-
sion is located, select the inf file, and click [Open].
y To install the PCL6 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PCL6\<language>".
y To install the PS3 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003,
locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PS\<language>".
When using Windows XP x64, select the following folder.

11 Click [OK].
12 Select the printer driver and click [OK].
y If any other printer driver(s) had already been installed on your computer, the Default
Printer screen is displayed. Continue to next step.
y If no printer driver had been installed on your computer, the complete screen is dis-
played. Skip to step 14.

13 Select whether using this printer as a default printer and click

[Next].
14 Click [Finish].

15 The printer driver is installed.
y If you want to install TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client Utilities
CD-ROM separately.
Windows Vista
Installing the printer driver for IPP printing by Add Printer Wizard
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” privilege.
1 Click [Start], select [Control Panel] and click [Printers] to open the
Printers folder.

2 Click [Add a printer].
y The Add Printer dialog box appears.
3 Click [Add a local printer].
4 Select “Create a new port” and select “Standard TCP/IP Port” in the
“Type of port” drop down menu. Then click [Next].

5 Select “Device type”, and enter “http://[IP address]:631/Print” in the

“Hostname or IP address” field.
y Enter the IP address of this equipment instead of [IP address].

Example: IP address = 10.10.70.120
http://10.10.70.120:631/Print
provided from DNS or WINS instead of [IP address].
Example: Print Server Name = Mfp-00c67861
http://Mfp-00c67861:631/Print
y When you connect from the Internet, enter the FQDN of this equipment provided from
DNS instead of [IP address].
Example: URL = mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com
http://mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com:631/Print
“P” for “Print” in the IPP URL must be capitalized. When you are using on Windows
Vista, the IPP port can be created by entering “print” (non-capitalized) in the IPP URL,
but the print job cannot be sent to the equipment. In that case, delete the IPP port and
then create the IPP port correctly again.
y If an administrator has enabled the IPP Port80 Enabled option on this equipment, you
can exclude the port number from the URL. (i.e. “http://192.168.255.48/Print”)
y If an administrator has enabled the Enable SSL option for IPP Print, you must enter
“https://[IP address]:[SSL port number]/Print” in the “URL” field.
(i.e. “https://192.168.255.48:443/Print”)
6 Click [Next].
When the Authentication setting for IPP Print is enabled, the dialog box to enter a user
name and password appears. If this dialog box appears, enter the user name and pass-
word and click [OK]. For user name and password, please ask your administrator.

7 Select “Device Type” in the “Type of port” drop down menu. Then
click [Next].


11 Locate the directory where the printer driver for your Windows ver-
sion is located, select the inf file, and click [Open].
y To install the PCL6 printer driver for Windows Vista,

locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PCL6\<language>".
y To install the PS3 printer driver for Windows Vista,
locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PS\<language>".
When using Windows Vista x64, select the following folder.

12 Click [OK].

y If any other printer driver(s) had already been installed on your computer, the Default
Printer screen is displayed. Continue to next step.
y If no printer driver had been installed on your computer, the complete screen is dis-
played. Skip to step 15.
y If the user account control is enabled, the [Installing device driver] dialog box is dis-
played. Click [Continue] to continue the installation.
y When the [Windows Security] dialog box is displayed, click [Install this driversoftware
anyway] to continue the installation.
14 Select whether using this printer as a default printer and click

[Next].

15 Click [Finish].
16 The printer driver is installed.
y If you want to install TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client Utilities
CD-ROM separately.
computer. To install the Font Manager, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-
ROM separately.

Installing Client Software for Novell Printing
This section describes how to install the client software for Novell printing on NetWare print
server environments.
There are two ways to set up the printer drivers for Novell printing:
When you insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer automati-
cally starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using the installer. If you
want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this method is convenient.
P.105 “Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer”
y Using Point and Print
You can install the printer driver by double-clicking network queues on the NetWare. If the
NetWare has been set up for NDPS, printer drivers can be downloaded from the system so
that the Client Utilities CD-ROM is not required. However, other client software cannot be
installed using this method.
P.112 “Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print”
In addition to the above methods, you can also install the printer driver using Add Printer Wizard.
The printer driver that is installed by Add Printer Wizard is set up same as Point and Print.
Before installing the printer driver for Novell printing, check with your system administrator to
- The NetWare server is configured correctly and running on your network.
- The IPX/SPX or TCP/IP, and NetWare settings are correct on this equipment.
Before installing the client software for Novell printing, please make sure following network ser-
vices and protocols are installed on your computer:
Windows 98/ME
y TCP/IP protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the TCP/IP network.)
y Novell Client 3.4
Windows NT 4.0
y Novell Client 4.9 SP1a
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

y Novell Client 4.91 SP2
Novell Client is not included in the Client Utilities CD-ROM. Novell Client can be downloaded
from the Novell Inc. homepage.
Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer

You can install the client software and set up the Novell printing using the installer in the Client
Utilities CD-ROM.
Installing Client Software for Novell Printing 105

Installing the client software for Novell printing using the installer
using Windows XP/Server 2003.
y You have an appropriate privilege to access the NetWare server.

appears.
ties CD-ROM.

[Next].
106 Installing Client Software for Novell Printing





6 Click [Next].
If the following dialog box appears, click [Continue] to proceed the operation.

7 Enter the queue name in the “Network path or queue name” field,
and click [Next].
For NDS/NDPS Mode
Example: Root=Org, Context=dept1, queue name=mfp_queue
\\Org\mfp_queue.dept1
For Bindery Mode

Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_queue
\\Nwsrv\mfp_queue
The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator. If you do not know
the queue for this equipment, ask your administrator.

8 Click [Next].
field.
9 Click [Finish].

Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print

The procedure to install the printer driver for Novell printing by Point and Print differs depending
on the version of Windows used.
P.112 “Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003”
y TopAccessDocMon is also available for Novell printing. To install TopAccessDocMon, you

puter. To install the Font Manager, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM sepa-
rately.
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003
Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print
dows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows Server 2003 is used.

1 Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network with
Windows Explorer, and double-click a queue.
When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, open the NetWare file server
and double-click the queue for the equipment.
When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, browse the NDS tree
and context, and double-click the queue for the equipment.
y When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for each Operating
System are installed to a NDPS broker, the printer driver is automatically installed.
y Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each Operating Sys-
tem are installed to a NDPS broker, the Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears. Con-
tinue to the next step.
2 Click [OK].


Server 2003 is located and click [Open].

7 Click [OK].


Windows 98/Me
Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print
1 Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network with
Windows Explorer, and double-click a queue.
When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, open the NetWare file server
and double-click the queue for the equipment.
When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, browse the NDS tree
and context, and double-click the queue for the equipment.
2 Click [Yes].

3 Select whether printing MS-DOS-based programs and click [Next].
y When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for each Operating
System are installed to a NDPS broker, the printer driver is automatically installed.
Skip to Step 10.
y Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each Operating Sys-
tem are installed to a NDPS broker, the Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears. Con-
tinue to the next step.
y The Open dialog box appears.



8 Click [OK].

10 Change the name if desired, select whether you are using this
printer as a default printer, and click [Next].
11 Select “Yes” to print a test page and click [Finish].
12 Make sure a test page is printed successfully and click [Yes] to

close the dialog box.

Installing Client Software for Web Services Print

Web Services Print is operated at the client computer using the function of Windows Vista via a
network.
You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” privilege.
y Web Services Print is the function of Windows Vista.

y A driver for Web Services Scanning is automatically installed as well as the client software.
For more information about Web Services Scanning, please see the Scanning Guide.
y Once the printer driver is installed from the Client Utilities CD-ROM, you will no longer need
the CD-ROM for the installation of the Web Service Print because the printer driver data will
remain.
y For the uninstallation procedure of the printer driver, see the following:
P.129 “Uninstalling Client Utilities Software”
Installing the printer driver for Web Services Print
Web Services Print is performed using the driver equiped in Windows Vista.
1 Click [Start] and click [Network]
y The Network screen is displayed.

y Go to Step 5 if the Network setting is enabled.
120 Installing Client Software for Web Services Print

2 Click [Network discovery is turned off, Network computers and
devices are not visible. Click to change…]. Then select [Turn on
network discovery and file sharing].
y The User account control dialog box appears.

y If the User account control is disabled, the Network discovery and file sharing screen
is displayed. Go to Step 4.
3 Click [Continue] in the User account control dialog box.

y The Network discovery and file sharing screen is displayed.
4 Click [Yes, turn on network discovery and file sharing for all public
networks].
y Devices are displayed in the Network screen.
Installing Client Software for Web Services Print 121

5 Select the desired device and right-click to make the menu appear.
Click [Install].
You can narrow down devices by checking [Multifunction Devices] on the [Category] drop
down menu.
y [PnPX Device Association] is displayed on the task bar.

y If the User account control is disabled, [Found New Hardware] is displayed on the
task bar.
Go to Step 8.
6 Click [PnPX Device Association] on the task bar.
y The User account control dialog box appears.
7 Click [Continue] in the User account control dialog box.

y [Found New Hardware] is displayed on the task bar.
You can check the installing status by clicking [Installing device driver software] on the
lower right-hand screen.
8 Click [Found New Hardware] on the task bar.
y The Found New Hardware dialog box appears.

9 Click [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
y The Found New Hardware-Unknown Device dialog box appears.
If the user account control is enabled, the [Installing device driver] dialog box is displayed. Click
[Continue] to continue the installation.
10 Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].

11 Set the Client Utilities CD-ROM to the CD-ROM drive, click

[Browse...] to specify the position of the CD-ROM drive and then
click [Next].
12 Select the printer driver (each language) to be installed, and then

click [Next].
y When installing the PSL3 printer driver (USA):

“(CD-ROM drive):\clientutilities\client\w2k_xp_vista\ps\usa\es2op2.inf”
When the [Windows Security] dialog box is displayed, click [Install this driversoftware
anyway] to continue the installation.


Installing Client Software for Novell iPrint

This section describes how to install the printer drivers for Novell iPrint.
y To set up the iPrint in the client computers, the NetWare server must be configured for iPrint
first. For more information about setting up the NetWare server for Novell iPrint, please see
Network Administration Guide.
y Before installing the printer driver for Novell iPrint, the printer driver for Novell iPrint, please
make sure the following environments are satisfied in your computer.
- Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later or Netscape 4.76 is installed (iPrint is not sup-
ported on Netscape 6)
- JavaScript must be enabled on the web browser.
Installing the printer driver for Novell iPrint
To install the printer driver for Novell iPrint on the client computer, download and install the iPrint
Client and printer driver from the NetWare server.
1 Start the your web browser and enter the following URL in the
address bar.
http://<IP address or DNS for NDPS Manager>/ipp
y If you do not know the IP address or DNS for NDPS Manager, please ask your net-
work administrator.
y If the IP address or DNS is secured using SSL, enter the URL address as following:
https://<IP address or DNS for NDPS Manager>/ipps
2 If the iPrint Client is not installed on your computer, you are

prompted to install it.
3 Click the printer that you want to install from the list of available
printers that is displayed in the iPrint web page.
y The selected printer driver is installed on your computer.
126 Installing Client Software for Novell iPrint

Installing Client Software from TopAccess
If the system administrator has uploaded the driver software to this equipment, you can use
TopAccess to install the software on your workstation.
y When using Windows Server 2003 that the Service Pack is installed, the installation from
TopAccess cannot be performed. In that case, please install the software in the other
method.
y For instructions on how to upload the software in the equipment, please refer to the TopAc-
cess Guide.
Installing client software from TopAccess for Windows
1 In TopAccess, click the Install Software link at the bottom of the

screen.
y The Install Client Software page opens.
2 Click the “Install Client1” link to download the installer file.
3 Download the installer file on your desktop by following the

prompts.
4 Double-click the “InstallClient1.exe” file that you downloaded.

y The installer starts and the InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.
Installing Client Software from TopAccess 127

5 Follow the installation procedure using the Client Utilities CD-ROM

described in following section.
P.38 “Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer”
P.64 “Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer”
P.105 “Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer”
128 Installing Client Software from TopAccess

Uninstalling Client Utilities Software
The following instructions describe how to uninstall the client software. The uninstallation proce-
dure is different how you installed the client software.
P.129 “When Installed Using the Installer”
P.134 “When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard”
When Installed Using the Installer

When the client software was installed using the Installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM or down-
loaded from TopAccess, you can delete all files using the Add/Remove Programs function.
You can uninstall all client software that have installed from the Client Utilities CD-ROM, or you
can uninstall only the components that you want to remove.
Client software other than the series cannot be removed.If you want to remove it, uninstall it with
printer drivers other than those in the series.
P.129 “Uninstalling all Client Utilities Software”

P.131 “Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove”
Uninstalling all Client Utilities Software
Before uninstalling the software, please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon.
1 Open “Control Panel” and click the “Add/Remove Programs” icon.
y The Add/Remove Programs dialog box appears.
Uninstalling Client Utilities Software 129

2 Select “TOSHIBA e-STUDIO452 Series Client” or “TOSHIBA e-

STUDIO282 Series Client” and click [Change/Remove].
y The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.
3 Select “Remove” and click [Next].
y The Confirm Uninstall dialog box appears.
4 Click [OK].
130 Uninstalling Client Utilities Software

5 Click [Yes] to delete the setting files.
y Deleting files starts.
If you want to re-install the client software later, click [No] to remain the setting files. You
can restore the data and settings when you re-install the client software.
6 Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and click [Finish]

to restart your computer.
y Some files may be deleted after restarting the computer.
Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove
Before uninstalling the software, please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon.

1 Open “Control Panel” and click the “Add/Remove Programs” icon.
y The Add/Remove Programs dialog box appears.
2 Select “TOSHIBA e-STUDIO452 Series Client” or “TOSHIBA e-

STUDIO282 Series Client” and click [Change/Remove].
y The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.

3 Select “Modify” and click [Next].
4 Uncheck the components that you want to uninstall and click

[Next].
5 Click [Next].

6 Click [Yes] to delete the setting files.
y Deleting files starts.
If you want to re-install the client software later, click [No] to remain the setting files. You
can restore the data and settings when you re-install the client software.
7 Click [Finish].
When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard

If only printer drivers are installed by Add Printer Wizard or Point and Print, you can uninstall
them by deleting the printer icons from the Printers folder.
Deleting printer drivers

Faxes folder.
y If you are using the Windows 2000/NT 4.0/Me/98, click [Start], select [Settings], and
click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.
y When using Windows Vista, click [Start], select [Control Panel], and click [Printers] to
open the Printers folder.
2 Select the printer drivers and select [Delete] in the [File] menu.
3 Click [Yes].
y When using Windows 98/Me or Windows NT 4.0, uninstallation has finished.

y When using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, continue to the next step.

4 Click the [File] menu and select [Server Properties].
y The Print Server Properties dialog box appears.
5 Display the Drivers tab. Select the printer drivers that you want to
delete, and click [Remove].
y The Printer Server Properties dialog box appears.
6 Click [Yes].
y The printer drivers are completely deleted.

Repairing Client Software
When the client software will not work correctly, you can repair the client software.
Repairing Client Utilities Software
y Do not perform preparing the client software on Windows XP that the Service Pack 2 is not
installed. In that case, uninstall the client software and then install again to repair the client
software.
y Before repairing the software, please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon and e-BRIDGE
Viewer.

ties CD-ROM.
2 Select “Repair” and click [Next].
y Repairing files starts.
If the printer drivers and N/W-Fax driver are installed, the Select Port screen is displayed.
If this screen is displayed, select “Local Port” and select the port for the printer drivers if
printer drivers were installed. If this screen is displayed, specify the network path or
queue name and click [Next].
Repairing Client Software 137

3 Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and click [Finish]

to restart your computer.
138 Repairing Client Software

Installing Client Software for Macintosh
3.
This section describes the instructions on how to install the client software on Macintosh.
About the Installation ...........................................................................................140

About Client Software for Macintosh...............................................................................................140
Planning for Installation...................................................................................................................140
Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x ..........................141

Installing the Macintosh PPD File ...................................................................................................141
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.x ...................................................................................144
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x...................................................157
Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x..............................................................168

Installing the Macintosh PPD File ...................................................................................................168
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x .....................................................................................168

3 Installing Client Software for Macintosh
About the Installation

Please refer to following instructions for configuring printing systems on Macintosh computers.
P.140 “About Client Software for Macintosh”
P.140 “Planning for Installation”
P.141 “Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x”
P.168 “Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x”
About Client Software for Macintosh

PostScript Printer Description File
The Macintosh PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file contains information about controller-
specific features. There are two PPD files provided in the Client Utilities CD-ROM: one is for
Mac OS 8.6/9.x and the other is for Mac OS X.
Information within the PPD file for Mac OS 8.6/9.x works in conjunction with the standard Macin-
tosh LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8.6.5 (or later). This Macintosh PPDs are supplied for
Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x and it also supports Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.
Information within the PPD file for Mac OS X works in conjunction with the Print Center (Mac OS
X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8) or Printer Setup Utility (Mac OS X 10.3.x to Mac OS X 10.4.x) on Mac OS X
10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x.
Planning for Installation
System Requirements
To install the printer drivers on a Mac OS computer, the following environment is required.
Display Resolution: 1028 x 768 dots or more
OS: Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x, Mac OS X 10.1 (Classic), Mac OS X 10.2 (Classic)
Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x
Protocol: TCP/IP, AppleTalk (Ethernet), Bonjour
Printer Driver: LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8.6.5 or later
(not required for Mac OS X)
Mac OS X 10.2 and its earlier versions of Mac OS X are supported in Classic mode using the
PPD file for Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x. This equipment also provides the PPD file for Mac OS X 10.2.4
to Mac OS X 10.3.x.

Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x
Install and configure the printer by the following steps:
P.141 “Installing the Macintosh PPD File”
P.157 “Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x”
P.165 “Configuring the installable options”
Installing the Macintosh PPD File

This equipment supports printing from Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x.
Installing the PPD file to Mac OS X
The following describes an installation on Mac OS 10.4.x. The procedure is the same when Mac
OS X 10.2.4 to 10.3.x is used.
1 Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and open
your language folder in the “Client:MacPPD:OSX” folder.
2 Copy the GZIP file (TOSHIBA_e-ST450_452Srs.dmg.gz or

TOSHIBA_e-ST280_282Srs.dmg.gz) to the desktop.
3 Double-click the GZIP file on the desktop.

y The Disk Image file (TOSHIBA_e-ST450_452Srs.dmg or TOSHIBA_e-
ST280_282Srs.dmg) is extracted on the desktop.
y If the installer window does appear, go to step 5.
4 Double-click the Disk Image file (TOSHIBA_e-ST450_452Srs.dmg or

TOSHIBA_e-ST280_282Srs.dmg).
y The installer window appears.
5 Double-click the icon in the installer window.
y The welcome message is displayed.
When you install the PPD file to Mac OS 10.2.4 to 10.2.8, the Authenticate dialog box
appears. In that case, enter the name and password and click [OK].
Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x 141

6 Click [Continue].
y The Software License Agreement window is displayed.
7 Click [Continue].
8 Click [Agree].
y The Select a Destination window is displayed.
142 Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x

9 Select the boot hard disk of your Mac OS X and click [Continue].
y The Easy Install window is displayed.
10 Click [Install] (or [Upgrade]).
y The Authenticate dialog box appears.
11 Enter the name and password, and click [OK].
y It start copying the PPD files for each language.
When you install the PPD file to Mac OS 10.2.4 to 10.2.8, the Authenticate dialog box
does not appear in this step.

12 Click [Close] to close the installer window.
13 Delete the GZIP files and Installer files created from the desktop.
14 Continue the procedure for configuring the printer.

P.157 “Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x”
P.144 “Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.x”
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.x

After you copy the PPD file to the library folder in the System Folder, you can configure the
printer.
This equipment supports the following Macintosh Printing Services: LPR Printing, AppleTalk
Printing, IPP Printing, and Bonjour Printing.
y LPR Printing
When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP/IP network, you can
enable LPR printing from Macintosh computer.
y AppleTalk Printing
When this equipment and your computer are connected over AppleTalk network, you can
enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computer.
y IPP Printing
enable IPP printing from Macintosh computer.
y Bonjour Printing
enable Bonjour printing from Macintosh computer.

Configuring Macintosh LPR printing
1 Start the Printer Setup Utility, located in the “Applications:Utilities”

folder in the Boot Disk.
y The Printer List dialog box appears.
2 Click [Add].

3 Click [IP Printer] and specify the items as described below.
Protocol: Line Printer Daemon - LPD

Address: <IP address or DNS name of this equipment>
Queue: print
Name: <Any Name>
Location: <Any Name>
Print Using: TOSHIBA e-ST450/452 Series PS (or UK PS)
TOSHIBA e-ST280/282 Series PS (or UK PS)
y In the “Name” field, the name that is entered in the Address field is automatically dis-
played.
y When you enter the IP address or DNS name of this equipment in the “Address” field,
the correct PPD file is automatically selected in the “Print Using” drop down menu. If
the correct PPD is not automatically selected, select “TOSHIBA” in the “Print Using”
drop down menu and select the PPD file displayed in the list.
4 Click [Add].
y The Installable Options window appears.

5 Set the following options.
y Finisher
Not Installed — Select this if a finisher is not installed.
Single-Position Stapler — Select this when the Hanging Finisher is installed.
Multi-Position Stapler — Select this when the Finisher or Saddle Stitch Finisher is
installed.
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch — Select this when the Finisher or Saddle
Stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed.
Job Separator — Select this when the Job Separator is installed.
Offset Stacker — Select this when the Offset Stacker is installed.
y Drawers
For e-STUDIO452 Series:
Not Installed — Select this when no optional drawer is installed.
Drawer 3 — Select this when the drawer 3 is installed.
Drawer 3 and 4 — Select this when the drawer 3 and 4 are installed.
LCF — Select this when the LCF is installed.

Drawer 1 — Select this when the Drawer 1 is installed.
Drawer 1 & LCF — Select this when the Drawer 1 and LCF are installed.
Drawer 1 & 3 — Select this when the Drawer 1 and Drawer 3 are installed.
Drawer 1,3 & 4 — Select this when the Drawer 1, Drawer 3 and Drawer 4 are installed.
Drawer 1,2 & LCF — Select this when the Drawer 1, Drawer 2 and LCF are installed.
Drawer 1,2,3 & 4 — Select this when the Drawer 1, Drawer2, Drawer 3 and Drawer 4 are
installed.
y LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

y The finisher options such as stapling and hole punching can be selected even if you
select “Not Installed” for the Finisher option. If you select the finisher options for print-
ing but the finisher is not installed, finisher settings will be ignored and perform print-
ing correctly.
y Automatic Duplexing Unit (e-STUDIO282 Series Only)

Not Installed — Select this when the Automatic Duplexing Unit is not installed.
Installed — Select this when the Automatic Duplexing Unit is installed.

6 Click [Continue].
y The printer is added to the Printer List.
Configuring Macintosh AppleTalk printing
1 Start the Printer Setup Utility, located “Applications:Utilities” folder

in the Boot Disk.
2 Click [Add].

3 Click [Default Browser] and select the equipment of the AppleTalk
connection displayed in the list.
y In the “Name” field, the device name that you selected in the list is automatically dis-
played.
y When you select the equipment in the list, the correct PPD file is automatically
selected in the “Print Using” drop down menu. If the correct PPD is not automatically
selected, select “TOSHIBA” in the “Print Using” drop down menu and select the PPD
file displayed in the list.
4 Click [Add].
y The Determining Installable Options window appears.
5 Click [Configure...] while the windows is displayed.

y Finisher
installed.
y Drawers

installed.

ing correctly.


7 Click [Continue].
Configuring Macintosh IPP Printing
When you want to setup IPP print queue in the Mac OS X, follow the procedures here.
1 Start the Printer Setup Utility, located “Applications:Utilities” folder

in the Boot Disk.
2 Click [Add].
y This is mandatory to show all the advanced print option in the drop down menu in the
Print List window.

3 Click [IP Printer] and specify the items as described below.
Protocol: Internet Printing Protocol - IPP

Address: <IP address or DNS name of this equipment>
Queue: Print
Name: <Any Name>
Location: <Any Name>
Print Using: TOSHIBA e-ST450/452 Series PS (or UK PS)
y In the “Name” field, the name that is entered in the Address field is automatically dis-
played.
y When you enter the IP address or DNS name of this equipment in the “Address” field,
the correct PPD file is automatically selected in the “Print Using” drop down menu. If
the correct PPD is not automatically selected, select “TOSHIBA” in the “Print Using”
drop down menu and select the PPD file displayed in the list.
When IPP/SSL is enabled, click [More Printers...] while pressing the [option] key. In the
displayed dialog box, select “Advanced” in the drop down menu and specify as follow-
ings:
- Device: Internet Printing Protocol (https)

- Device Name: <Any Name>

- Device URI: https://<IP address>:443/Print
- Printer Model: TOSHIBA
- PPD: TOSHIBA e-ST450/452 Series PS (or UK PS)
4 Click [Add].
y Finisher
installed.

y Drawers

installed.

ing correctly.

6 Click [Continue].
Configuring Macintosh Bonjour Printing
1 Start the Printer Setup Utility, located in the “Applications:Utilities”


2 Click [Add].
Print List window.
3 Click [Default Printer] and select the equipment of the Bonjour con-
nection displayed in the list.
y In the “Name” field, the device name that you selected in the list is automatically dis-
played.
y When you select the equipment in the list, the correct PPD file is automatically
selected in the “Print Using” drop down menu. If the correct PPD is not automatically
selected, select “TOSHIBA” in the “Print Using” drop down menu and select the PPD
file displayed in the list.
4 Click [Add].

y Finisher
installed.
y Drawers

installed.

ing correctly.


6 Click [Continue].
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x

After you copy the PPD file to the library folder in the System Folder, you can configure the
printer.
This equipment supports the following Macintosh Printing Services: LPR Printing, AppleTalk
Printing, IPP Printing, and Bonjour Printing.
y LPR Printing
y IPP Printing
enable IPP printing from Macintosh computer.
y Bonjour Printing
enable Bonjour printing from Macintosh computer.
The following describes an operation on Mac OS 10.3.x. The procedure is the same when Mac
OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8 is used.

1 Start the Print Center (for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8) or Printer Setup
Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3.x), located in the “Applications:Utilities”
Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8
Mac OS X 10.3.x
2 Click [Add].

3 Select “IP Printing” in the drop down menu and specify the items
as described below.
Printer Type: LPD/LPR

Printer’s Address: <IP address or DNS name of this equipment>
Queue Name: print
Printer Model: TOSHIBA
PPD: TOSHIBA e-ST450/452 Series PS (or UK PS)
y For Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8, the “Printer Type” drop down menu does not dis-
played.
y For Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8, please uncheck the “Use default queue on server”
box.
4 Click [Add].
5 Continue the procedure to configure the installable options.

OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8 is used.

Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3.x), located “Applications:Utilities” folder
in the Boot Disk.
Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8
Mac OS X 10.3.x
2 Click [Add].
3 Select “AppleTalk” in the drop down menu and select the zone
name that this equipment is located. Then select the equipment
displayed in the list.
y If the AppleTalk network is not configured with a zone, select “Local AppleTalk zone”.

4 Select “TOSHIBA” at the “Printer Model” drop down menu, and
select the PPD file.
5 Click [Add].

Configuring Macintosh IPP Printing
When you want to setup IPP print queue in the Mac OS X, follow the procedures here.
OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8 is used.

Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3.x), located “Applications:Utilities” folder
in the Boot Disk.
Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8
Mac OS X 10.3.x
2 Click [Add] while pressing the [option] button.
Print List window.

3 Select “Advanced” in the drop down menu and specify the items as
described below.
Device: Mac OS 10.2.x: Internet Printing Protocol (http)

Mac OS 10.3.x: Internet Printing Protocol using HTTP
Device Name: <Any Name>
Device URI: http://<IP address>:631/Print
Printer Model: TOSHIBA
PPD: TOSHIBA e-ST450/452 Series PS (or UK PS)
When IPP/SSL is enabled, specify as followings:

- Device URL: https://<IP address>:443/Print
4 Click [Add].

Configuring Macintosh Bonjour Printing
OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8 is used.

Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3.x), located in the “Applications:Utilities”
Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8
Mac OS X 10.3.x
2 Click [Add].
Print List window.

3 Select “Rendezvous” in the drop down menu and select the equip-
ment displayed in the list.
In Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.3.x, the “Bonjour” is named as “Rendezvous”.
4 Select “TOSHIBA” at the “Printer Model” drop down menu, and

select the PPD file.
5 Click [Add].

Configuring the installable options
OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8 is used.

1 In the Printer List dialog box, select the printer and, then, select
[Show Info] in the [Printers] menu.
y The Printer Info dialog box appears.
2 Select “Installable Options” in the drop down menu.
y The Installable Options window is displayed.

y Finisher
installed.
y Drawers

installed.

ing correctly.

4 Click [Apply Changes] and close the window.

Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

Installing the Macintosh PPD File
The Macintosh PPD file that is provided in the Client Utilities CD-ROM can be installed by copy-
ing it to the System Folder: Extensions: Printer Descriptions folder.
This PPD file supports printing from Mac OS X 8.6 or 9.x. In addition, it supports printing with
these operating systems running on the Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic Mode. The options need
to be configured manually in Mac OS X 10.1.
Copying the PPD file to Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x
1 Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and open
your language folder in the “Client:MacPPD:OS9” folder.
2 Copy the Stufflt file (TOSHIBA_e-ST450_452Srs.sit or TOSHIBA_e-

ST280_282Srs.sit) to the desktop, and extract the Macintosh PPD
file.
To extract the file, the Stufflt utility must be installed on your computer. For instructions
on how to extract the file, refer to your StuffIt documentation.
3 Double-click the boot drive icon and open the “System

Folder:Extensions:Printer Descriptions” folder.
4 Select and drag the Macintosh PPD file that you extracted to the
“Printer Descriptions” folder.
5 Continue the procedure for configuring the printer.

P.168 “Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x”
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

After you copy the PPD file to the Printer Descriptions folder in the System Folder, you can con-
figure the printer.
This equipment supports two types of Macintosh Printing Service: LPR Printing or AppleTalk
Printing.
y LPR Printing
Before installing the printer driver for LPR printing on Macintosh, check with your system admin-
istrator to make sure of the following:
- The TCP/IP setting is correct.
- LPD Printing Service is enabled on this equipment.
168 Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

1 Start the Desktop Printer Utility.
y The folder containing the Desktop Printer Utility differs depending on the Mac OS ver-
sion. If you cannot locate the Desktop Printer Utility, search it in the boot disk.
y The New Desktop Printer dialog box appears.
2 Make sure “LaserWriter 8” is selected in the “With” drop down

menu, select “Printer (LPR)” and click [OK].
y The Macintosh LPR Printer Selection dialog box opens.
3 Click [Change...] in the PostScript Printer Description (PPD) File

area.
y The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears.
4 Select the PPD file (TOSHIBA_e-ST450_452Srs or TOSHIBA_e-

ST280_282Srs) for the equipment and click [Select].
Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x 169

5 Click [Change...] in the LPR Printer Selection area.
y The Internet Printer dialog box appears.
6 Enter the IP Address of this equipment in the “Printer Address”

field and “Print” in the “Queue” field. Then click [OK].
7 Click [Create...].
8 Enter the Desktop Printer name and click [Save].
y The printer is added to the desktop.
9 Double-click the desktop printer icon that you created.

y The Desktop Printer utility window opens.

10 Click the [Printing] menu and select [Change Setup...].
y The LaserWriter setup dialog box appears.
11 Select each option item in the “Change” drop down menu and
select installed option in the “To” drop down menu according to the
configuration of this equipment.
y Finisher
installed.
When you select “Multi-Position Stapler” or “Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch”, the
saddle-stitching function will be selectable for printing. However, saddle-stitching is
available only when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed.

y Drawers

installed.
LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

12 Click [OK].
Before installing the printer driver for AppleTalk printing on Macintosh, check with your system
administrator to make sure of the following:
- The AppleTalk settings is correct.
1 Click Apple menu and select [Chooser].
y The Chooser dialog box appears.

2 Select the LaserWriter 8 icon (and select the AppleTalk zone if con-
figured). Then select this equipment displayed in the list, and click
[Create].
y The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears.
3 Select the PPD file (TOSHIBA_e-ST450_452Series) or (TOSHIBA_e-

ST280_282Series) for the equipment and click [Select].
4 Select each option according to the configuration of this equipment

and click [OK].
y Finisher
installed.
When you select “Multi-Position Stapler” or “Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch”, the
saddle-stitching function will be selectable for printing. However, saddle-stitching is
available only when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed.

y Drawers

installed.

5 Close the Chooser Dialog box.

y The Printer icon is created on the desktop.

method.
cess Guide.
Installing client software from TopAccess for Macintosh

screen.
2 Click the “Macintosh PPD Files” link.
y The software components list is displayed.

3 Click the File Name link that you want to download.
y For e-STUDIO452 Series

TOSHIBA_e-ST450_452Srs.sit — Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS
8.6/9.x and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.
TOSHIBAeST450_452Srs.dmg.gz — Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS
X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x.
y For e-STUDIO282 Series
TOSHIBA_e-ST280_282Srs.sit — Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS
8.6/9.x and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.
TOSHIBAeST280_282Srs.dmg.gz — Click this link to download the PPD file for Mac OS
X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x.
4 Download the PPD file of your Mac OS version on your desktop by

following the prompts.
5 After you download the PPD file, refer to the installation procedure
for Macintosh to set up the printer.
P.168 “Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x”
P.141 “Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x”

Installing Client Software for UNIX
4.
This section describes the instructions on how to install the client software on UNIX.
Setting Up the UNIX Filters ..................................................................................178

About UNIX Filters ..........................................................................................................................178
System Requirements.....................................................................................................................178
Configuring UNIX Printing Using UNIX Filters ................................................................................179
Setting Up the CUPS.............................................................................................187

About CUPS....................................................................................................................................187
Configuring UNIX Printing Using CUPS..........................................................................................187

4 Installing Client Software for UNIX
Setting Up the UNIX Filters

About UNIX Filters
In the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the following filters for UNIX workstations are included:
net_estbw
This file is a shell script that will be installed in “/usr/lib/lp/model”. It contains all the parsing for
the printer specific commands and it generates all the output code. Being a shell script, a system
administrator can modify it if a site requires any custom options or if other components are
installed in non-standard locations.
lpdsend
This is an executable program that is called by net_estbw to send the print file to the system
using the LPD protocol. This program will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”.
lpLinux.sh (Linux filter only)

This file is a shell script that simulates the command line functions of lp. After processing the
command line options, the e-STUDIO filter is invoked in the same way as a System V print filter.
This file is installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link to this file will be installed in the “/
usr/local/bin” directory as lptap.
estbwBackend (AIX filter only)

This is an executable program that is called by the AIX qdaemon. It receives the arguments from
the qdaemon, interrogates it for copy information etc. then calls the queues' copy of net_estbw
to run the print. This program will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”.
estbwadd
This file is a shell script that is used to create a printer description. This file will be installed in “/
opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link will be installed in the “/bin” directory that will point to the
actual location of this file.
estbwrm
This file is a shell script that is used to remove a printer description. This file will be installed in “/
opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link will be installed in the “/bin” directory that will point to the
actual location of this file.
net_estbw.1
This is an input file for the man command that supplies online documentation for the printer spe-
cific options. This file will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/man/man1”. A symbolic link will be
installed in the /usr/man/man1 directory that will point to the actual location of this file.
System Requirements
For UNIX workstation, the following environment is required.
OS: Sun Solaris v2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9
HP-UX ver.10.20/11.x
IBM AIX 4.3.3
SCO UnixWare 7
SCO OpenUnix 8
Red Hat Linux 7.x/8.0/9.x
Red Hat Linux Enterprise WS2
SuSE Linux ver.7.x/8.x/9.x
Mandrake Linux ver.7.x./8.x/9.x
Turbo Linux 8/10
Protocol: TCP/IP
178 Setting Up the UNIX Filters

Module: Python must be installed.
The “Python” module must be installed on your UNIX workstation to enable printing. The
“Python” module is usually installed in the “/usr/bin/” directory. Check this directory whether the
“Python” module is installed.
Configuring UNIX Printing Using UNIX Filters

When you want to configure the UNIX printing using the UNIX filters, install the UNIX filters and
configure the LPR queue.
Installing the UNIX Filters

UNIX Filters are provided as TAR files for each Operating System. You can install them by
copying the TAR file into the root directory and extract the file.
Copying the UNIX filters
2 Log on to the root account.
3y Enter the following command and check the output:

For Solaris:
uname -a
Output on screen should be:
SunOS
y For HP-UX:
uname -a
HP-UX
y For IBM AIX:
uname -a
AIX
y For Linux:
uname -a
Linux
y For OpenUNIX:
uname -a
OpenUNIX
If the output is not as above, ask your administrator.
Setting Up the UNIX Filters 179

4 Copy the TAR file onto the root.

y A TAR file for each operating system is included in following folders:
For Solaris: [CD-ROM]/Admin/SolarisFilter/Usa/
For HP-UX:[CD-ROM]/Admin/HP-UXFilter/Usa/
For AIX:[CD-ROM]/Admin/AixFilter/Usa/
For Linux: [CD-ROM]/Admin/LinuxFilter/Usa/
For OpenUNIX: [CD-ROM]/Admin/OpenUnixFilter/Usa/
5 Change to the root directory.
6y Enter the following command:

For Solaris:
tar xvf solaris.tar
y For HP-UX:
tar xvf hpux.tar
y For IBM AIX:
tar xvf aix.tar
y For Linux:
tar xvf linux.tar
y For OpenUNIX:
tar xvf openunix.tar
7 The command extracts all the required files and installs them in the
correct locations. Continue the procedure for configuring the print
queue.
P.180 “Configuring the Print Queue”
Configuring the Print Queue

After you copy UNIX Filters, you can configure the print queue.
There are two ways to configure the print queue: one is creating a print queue using estbwadd,
and the other is creating a print queue manually without using estbwadd.
P.180 “Creating a Print Queue Using estbwadd”
P.181 “Creating a Print Queue Manually”
— Creating a Print Queue Using estbwadd

You can create a print queue using estbwadd.
Creating a print queue

2 Enter the following command:
estbwadd <queue name> <host name or IP address>
y This command creates a print queue using the system’s lpadmin command. It also
creates a configuration file that has the destination IP address or host name. Use the
configuration file to change print queue parameters.
y The lpadmin command stores the printer interface file in the /etc/lp/interfaces direc-
tory in a file with the same name as the print queue. The configuration file is stored in
the /etc/lp/interfaces directory in a file named <queue name>.conf.
y Under Linux, the printtool (or equivalent) utility must be used to add the printer into
the lp printing system after executing the est coloradd command.
— Creating a Print Queue Manually

You can also configure the print queue by adding a remote printer manually.
The procedure varies depending on the operating systems.
P.181 “Creating a print queue manually on Solaris”
P.182 “Creating a print queue manually on HP-UX”
P.182 “Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX”
P.183 “Creating a print queue manually on Linux”
P.184 “Creating a print queue manually on OpenUNIX”
Creating a print queue manually on Solaris
2 Open your Linux/UNIX editor.
3 Create the following file.

/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf
4 Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.

dest=<IP address>
5 Save the file.

chmod +x <queue name>.conf

chown lp:lp <queue name>.conf

lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_estbw

accept <queue name>

enable <queue name>

Creating a print queue manually on HP-UX


dest=<IP address>
5 Save the file.



ps -ef | grep lpsched | grep -iv grep > /dev/null 2>&1

Echo $?
10 If “0” is outputted on the screen, turn the scheduler OFF. Enter the
following command:
/usr/sbin/lpshut > /dev/null 2>&1

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null \
-m net_estbw -o rm <queue name> -orpdssc -ob3

accept <queue name>

enable <queue name>
14 If you turn OFF the scheduler in step 10, turn the scheduler ON.
Enter the following command:
/usr/lpsched > /dev/null 2>&1
Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/filter
2 If the above directory does not exist, enter the following command:
mkdir /opt/toshiba/tap/filter


dest=<IP address>
7 Save the file.

mkque -q <queue name> \
-a s_statfilter = /usr/lib/lpd/bsdshort \
-a up = TRUE -a host = <IP address> -a rq = dssc

mkquedev -q <queue name> -d dev_<queue name> \
-a backend = /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/estbwBackend

cp /usr/lib/lpd/pio/predef/net_estbw \
/opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>
Creating a print queue manually on Linux

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/interface
2 If the above directory does not exist, enter the following command:
mkdir /opt/toshiba/tap/interface
3 As root open your Linux/UNIX editor.

/opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>.conf

dest=<IP address>
7 Save the file.

cp /opt/toshiba/tap/model/net_estbw \
/opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/modPrintcap \
-a <queue name> <IP address>

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>
11 If the above file exists, enter the following command.

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/printconf_import \
-a <queue name> IP_ADDRESS \
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>
12 Restart your lpd.

Creating a print queue manually on OpenUNIX


dest=<IP address>
5 Save the file.



lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_estbw

accept <queue name>

enable <queue name>
Changing the Default Values

You can change the default values of a print queue by the following procedure.
Changing the default values of a print queue
1 Study the interface file, named <queue name>, stored in the /etc/lp/
interfaces directory.
y This file contains all of the default settings and values that can be set. These values
are case sensitive and must conform to the /bin/sh variable format.
2 To manually edit the configuration file (/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue

name>.conf), add a line that consists of the parameter and value.
y For example, to change the default orientation to Landscape, add the following line:
orient= “LANDSCAPE”
Deleting the Print Queue

There are two ways to delete the print queue: one is deleting a print queue using estbwrm, and
the other is deleting a print queue manually without using estbwrm.
P.185 “Deleting a Print Queue Using estbwrm”
P.185 “Deleting a Print Queue Manually”

— Deleting a Print Queue Using estbwrm
When you want to delete the queue using estbwrm, perform the following procedure.
Deleting a print queue

estbwrm <queue name>
y This command uses the system’s lpadmin command to delete the print queue and
configuration file.
y Please restart the lpd under Linux.
— Deleting a Print Queue Manually

You can also configure the print queue by adding a print queue manually.
The procedure varies depending on the operating systems.
P.185 “Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris”
P.185 “Deleting a print queue manually on HP-UX”
P.186 “Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX”
P.186 “Deleting a print queue manually on Linux”
P.186 “Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUNIX”
Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris

lpadmin -x <queue name>

rm /etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf
Deleting a print queue manually on HP-UX

ps -ef | grep lpsched | grep -iv grep > /dev/null 2>&1

Echo $?
4 If “0” outputted on the screen, turn the scheduler OFF. Enter the
following command:
/usr/sbin/lpshut > /dev/null 2>&1

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x <queue name>


7 If “0” was outputted on the screen in step 3, turn the scheduler ON.
Enter the following command:
/usr/sbin/lpsched > /dev/null 2>&1
Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX

rm /opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>

rm /opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>.conf

rmquedev -q <queue name> -d dev_<queue name>

rmque -q <queue name>
Deleting a print queue manually on Linux

rm /opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>

rm /opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>.conf

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/modPrintcap -d <queue name>

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>
6 If the above file exists, enter the following command:

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/printconf_import \
-d <queue name> \
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>
7 Restart your lpd.
Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUNIX

lpadmin -x <queue name>


Setting Up the CUPS
When you want to configure the UNIX printing using CUPS, you can use LPR printing or IPP
printing.
When printing using CUPS, the output paper size cannot be specified. If you want to specify the
output paper size, please use the UNIX filter.
About CUPS
This section describes the behavior, options, and installation method of the CUPS printer driver
for the equipment. The behavior of the printer driver presented in this specification is consistent
with CUPS v1.1.15. The driver may appear and/or operate slightly differently in the different ver-
sions.
In reality, the file supplied in this package is not really a printer driver it is actually a PostScript
Printer Description (PPD) file.
Development Environment
The provided CUPS printer driver is supported on the following UNIX workstation.
y Red Hat 8.0 CUPS 1.1.18
Implementation Method
This driver consists of a PPD file that works in conjunction with an interface like XPP, KPrinter,
etc. It can also be used on OSX in the same way that it is used on Linux, but this is not recom-
mended.
Supplied Components
There is one supplied component, a PPD file called “TOSHIBA_EST450_452_CUPS.gz” or
“TOSHIBA_EST280_282_CUPS.gz”. It has been compressed using gzip. It does not need to be
uncompressed for Linux to use the PPD file and so it should be left compressed.
The user needs root privileges to place the PPD file in the default location. The default location
for the standard CUPS PPD files is:
/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba
Configuring UNIX Printing Using CUPS

You can configure the CUPS for LPR printing or IPP printing.
Installing the CUPS for LPR Printing

The PPD must first be copied onto the local machine, the printer installed, and then the PPD
configured. The printer is then installed and configured using CUPS via the browser.
The PPD is placed in the “/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba” directory (which will require root privi-
leges and the Toshiba directory may need to be created). The PPD can be simply copied to the
appropriate directory and the CUPS daemon re-started.
Installing the CUPS for LPR printing
Setting Up the CUPS 187

2 Log on to the root account and create “Toshiba” directory in the

“/usr/share/cups/model” directory.
3 Copy the GZIP file into the “/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba” direc-

tory or enter the following command:
cp TOSHIBA_EST450_452_CUPS.gz /usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba
or
y A GZIP file is included in the “Admin/CUPS/Usa” folder in the CD-ROM.

service lpd stop
If lpd is already stopped, “Failed” will be displayed.
y When using the Red Hat Linux, continue to the next step.
y When using other than the Red Hat Linux, skip to step 10.
5 When using the Red Hat Linux, enter the following command:
/usr/bin/redhat-switch-printer
y The redhat-switch-printer dialog box appears.
6 Select “CUPS” and click [OK].

y The information dialog box appears.
7 Click [OK].

service cups start
If the CUPS has already been started, stop the CUPS service once by entering “service
cups stop” command, and then enter the above command to restart the CUPS service.

/usr/bin/cupsconfig
y The Common UNIX Printing System page appears. Skip to step 11.
10 Open the browser and locate CUPS by typing

“http://local host:631/” in the address field.
y The Common UNIX Printing System page appears.
188 Setting Up the CUPS

11 Click the “Manage Printers” link.
y The Printer page is displayed.
12 Click [Add Printer].
y The Admin page is displayed.
13 Enter the printer name, location, and description of the printer in

each field and click [Continue].
If a new printer name is a duplicate of a name already in the printer list, the new printer
will replace the original printer.

14 Select “LPD/LPR Host or Printer” at the “Device” drop down menu

and click [Continue].
15 Enter “lpd://<IP address>/Print” in the “Device URI” field and click

[Continue].
Make sure to capitalize the “P” in “Print” for the device URI.
16 Select “TOSHIBA” at the “Make” list and click [Continue].
If you do not see “TOSHIBA” in the “Make” list, restart CUPS.

17 Select the PPD in the “Model” list and click [Continue].
18 Confirm that the message notifying that the new printer has been
properly added appears.
19 Go to the following page for configuring the print options:

P.193 “Configuring print options”
Installing the CUPS for IPP Printing

When you want to setup IPP print queue in the Linux OS, follow the procedures here.
When IPP SSL is enabled on the Equipment

When the IPP SSL is enabled on the equipment, you requires the following settings on Linux
OS.
y OpenSSL should be installed
y CUPS should be configured with “--enable-ssl” option
y HTTPS symbol should be created in the “/usr/lib/cups/backend” directory.
1. Open the console and login with root privileges.
- Use ‘su’ or ‘sudo -s’ to login with root privileges.
2. Enter the following command:
cd /usr/lib/cups/backend
ln -s ipp https
4. Restart the CUPS Service in Linux.
y IPP/SSL certificates in the “/etc/cups” directory should be created
mkdir ssl folder in /etc/cups


openssl req -new -x509
-keyout /etc/cups/ssl/server.key
-out /etc/cups/ssl/server.crt -days 365 -nodes
The above command must be entered as one continuous command with no carriage returns.

chmod 600 /etc/cups/ssl/server.*
* The “-nodes” option prevents the certificate and key from being encrypted.
The cupsd process runs in the background, detached from any input source; if you encrypt
these files then cupsd will not be able to load them.
4. Add the following lines in the cupsd.conf file in /etc/cups path.
SSLPort 443
ServerCertificate /etc/cups/ssl/server.crt
ServerKey /etc/cups/ssl/server.key
5. Run the following command on the shell to restart the CUPS Server.
Service cups restart
Add IPP Printer
IPP printing from Linux OS is done from the CUPS server as a backend.
2 Log on to the root account and create “Toshiba” directory in the

“/usr/share/cups/model” directory.
3 Copy the GZIP file into the “/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba” direc-

tory or enter the following command:
or
y A GZIP file is included in the “Admin/CUPS/Usa” folder in the CD-ROM.

service lpd stop
If lpd is already stopped, “Failed” will be displayed.
y When using the Red Hat Linux, continue to the next step.
y When using other than the Red Hat Linux, skip to step 10.
5 When using the Red Hat Linux, enter the following command:
/usr/bin/redhat-switch-printer
y The redhat-switch-printer dialog box appears.
6 Select “CUPS” and click [OK].

y The information dialog box appears.
7 Click [OK].

service cups start
If the CUPS has already been started, stop the CUPS service once by entering “service
cups stop” command, and then enter the above command to restart the CUPS service.

/usr/bin/cupsconfig
y The Common UNIX Printing System page appears. Skip to step 11.
10 Open the browser and locate CUPS by typing

“http://local host:631/” in the address field.
y The Common UNIX Printing System page appears.
When IPP/SSL is enabled, specify “https://local host:433/” in the address field to access
the Common UNIX Printing System.
11 Add a new https printer by clicking [Add Printer].

Configure the parameters as:
Name: <Any Name>
Location: <Optional>
Description: <Optional>
Device: Internet Printing Protocol (http)
Device URL: http://<IP address>:631/Print
Model/Driver: TOSHIBA
When IPP/SSL is enabled, specify as followings:

- Device URL: https://<IP address>:443/Print
Using CUPS Client (print commands lp, lpr, etc.) with -e option, the connection can be
encrypted and printing can be done in the above configured printer.
12 Confirm that the message notifying that the new printer has been
properly added appears.
13 Go to the following page for configuring the print options:

P.193 “Configuring print options”
Configuring print options

You can set the print options that applied for the print jobs using CUPS.

Print option configuration
1 Click the “Manage Printers” link in the startup page.
The Printer page is displayed.
2 Select this equipment and then click [Configure Printer].
3 Configure the print options on the displayed page.

The underscored items are set by default.
Booklet
Option Value Alternative Value Description
Booklet Center Margin 0 to 36 (in unit of 3 points) Select the center margin.
Booklet Outer Margin 0 to 72 (in unit of 6 points) Select the outer margin.
Booklet Paper Size None (Off) Select a paper size for the booklet.
Letter Each two pages are printed on both
A4 side of a sheet which is then folded.
Legal The booklet size will be the half size
Statement of the paper size that you specify.
Ledger
Folio
A3
A5
B4
B5
Computer
13” LG
8.5” SQ
8K
16K
Left to Right Page Lay- Right to Left Select whether to create a booklet
out Left to Right can be read from right to left or left to
right.
[Continue] button Determines the selected items.

DIN
Private Print Document 0 to 9 Specify the 5-digit document pass-
ID - Digit 1 to Digit 5 word when “Private - Password” is
selected for “Print Modes”.
Finishing
Destination Inner Tray Select the destination.
Job Separator Upper
Job Separator Lower
Tray 1
Tray 2
Hole Punch Off Select whether or not a print job is
Long Edge Punch without rotation hole punched.
Short Edge Punch without rotation
Long Edge Punch with 180 degree
rotation
Short Edge Punch with 180 degree
rotation
Stapling Off whether a print job is stapled.
Upper Left (Portrait)/Upper Right
(Landscape)
Middle Left (Portrait)/Middle Top
(Landscape) “Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch
Lower Left (Portrait)/Upper Left (Landscape)” can be selected only
(Landscape)/Upper Right (Portrait)/ when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is
Lower Right (Landscape) installed.
Middle Right (Portrait)/Middle Bottom
(Landscape)
Lower Right (Portrait)/Lower Left
(Landscape)
Middle Top (Portrait)/Middle Right
(Landscape)
Middle Bottom (Portrait)/Middle Left
(Landscape)

General
Collate Yes, No Select whether exited sheets are collated or not.
Duplex 1-Sided 1-sided printing
2-Sided, No Tumble 2-sided printing (Long-edge binding)
(Long-Edge Binding)
2-Sided, Tumble 2-sided printing (Short-edge binding)
(Short-Edge Binding)
Media Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, Select the paper size.
Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Statement, Folio, Com-
puter, 13” LG, 8.5” SQ,
8K, 16K
Media Source Auto (Default) Select the paper source.
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
LCF
Drawer 3
Drawer 4
Bypass Tray
Plain
Thick 1
Thick 2
Thick 3
Transparency
Options Installed
Drawers Not Installed Select the combination among
Drawer 3 Drawer 3, Drawer 4, and LCF.
Drawer 3 and 4
LCF
Finisher Not Installed Select whether the optional finisher is
Single Position Stapler installed or not.
Multi-Position Stapler
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch
Job Separator
Offset Tray

Printing Modes
Department Code Disabled Select whether to use the department
Enabled codes for printing or not.
When this equipment is managed
under the department codes, this
option should be enabled.
Distinguish Thin Lines Off, On Select whether to distinguish thin
lines or not.
Do not Print Blank Off, On Select whether to distinguish thin
Pages lines or not.
Do not Print Blank Pages
Print Mode Normal Select the print mode.
Proof
Private - Password
Printing Modes DC
Department Code (DC) - 0 to 9 Specify the 5-digit department code
Digit 1 to Digit 5 when “Department Code” of “Printing
Modes” is enabled.
For the appropriate department code,
check with your system administrator.
Quality
Halftone Auto Select the appropriate processing on
Detail halftone images among “Auto”, “Detail
Smooth (high density)” and “Smooth (smooth
tone reproduction)”.
Smoothing Off, On Select whether to enable the smooth-
ing mode.
Toner Save Off, On Select whether to enable the toner
save mode.

Banners
Starting Banner none Select whether banner pages are printed before
printing documents or not.
If they are, select among the items below.
classified Classified information
confidential Confidential information
secret Secret information
standard Standard information
topsecret Top secret
unclassified Unclassified information
Ending Banner none Select whether banner pages are printed after print-
ing documents or not.
If they are, select among the items below.
classified Classified information
confidential Confidential information
secret Secret information
standard Standard information
topsecret Top secret
unclassified Unclassified information
PS Binary Protocol
PS Binary Protocol None, TBCP Select whether print data are processed in a binary
format using PostScript and printed using TBCP
protocol or not.
Modifying Printer
You can modify the printer that you create.
Modifying Printer
You can change the location and description of the printer.

2 Click [Modify Printer].
3 Modify the location and description in each field and click [Con-
tinue].
Uninstalling Printer
To uninstall the printer that you create, perform the following procedure.

Uninstalling Printer
2 Click [Delete Printer].
y The printer is deleted.
3 Then delete the PPD file “TOSHIBA_EST450_452_CUPS.gz” or

“TOSHIBA_EST280_282_CUPS.gz” from the “/usr/share/cups/
model/Toshiba” directory.


method.
cess Guide.
Installing client software from TopAccess for UNIX

screen.
2 Click the “Unix Filters” link.
y The software components list is displayed.

3 Click the UNIX filter link that you want to install.
4 Download the UNIX tar file containing the UNIX filters on your desk-
top by following the prompts.
5 After you download the UNIX tar file, refer to the installation proce-
dure for UNIX to set up the printer.
P.178 “Setting Up the UNIX Filters”

Printing from Windows
5.
This describes the instructions on how to print from Windows computer.
Before Using the Printer Driver ...........................................................................206

Configuring the Options ..................................................................................................................206
Setting the Department Code.......................................................................................................... 211
Copying the PPD File for Windows .................................................................................................213
Printing from Application.....................................................................................214

Considerations and Limitations .......................................................................................................214
How to Print.....................................................................................................................................214
Setting Up Print Options ......................................................................................217

How to Setup...................................................................................................................................217
Print Options ...................................................................................................................................221
Printing with Extended Print Functionality ........................................................249

Printing Various Print Job Types .....................................................................................................249
Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options ........................................................................256
5 Printing from Windows
Before Using the Printer Driver

Before printing, you have to configure the following options:
y Configuration Settings
You have to configure such options as optional drawers, finisher, and hole punch unit. The
features of these optional devices are not available unless you tell the system that the
optional devices are installed.
y Department Code
This system can manage jobs by department code. This feature lets you manage job
counters for every department code. For example, a network administrator can check the
number of copies printed from specific department member.
If the Department Code is enabled, enter your Department Code provided by your adminis-
trator.
Configuring the Options

After you complete the installation of the printer drivers, you should configure the option settings
on the printer drivers.
There are two methods to configure the options;
y If this equipment and your computer are not connected in the TCP/IP network, you can con-
figure the options manually.
P.206 “Configuring the Options Manually”
y If this equipment and your computer are connected in the TCP/IP network, you can configure
the options automatically obtaining the settings using SNMP communication.
P.209 “Configuring the Options Automatically”
When the printer drivers are installed using Point and Print on Windows 98/Me, you must click
[Update Now] in the [Configuration] tab before starting to use the printer.
Configuring the Options Manually

The following describes an instruction on Windows XP. The procedure is the same when other
Setting the configuration tab manually
lege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.
y When using Windows Vista
In order to open the Fonts tab, right-click the printer icon and select [Run as administrator].
Then enter the administrator's password of the client computer to operate with an adminis-
trator's privilege.
206 Before Using the Printer Driver

1 Select the printer driver in the Printers and Faxes folder. Then click
[File] and select [Properties].
y When you are operating under Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, open the Printers folder
to access the printer driver.
Before Using the Printer Driver 207

2 Display the [Configuration] tab, check off the “Enable SNMP Com-
munication” option, and set the following options.
Model Selection — This sets the model type of the equipment.

Automatic Duplexing Unit — This sets whether or not optional automatic duplexing unit
is installed. (For e-STUDIO282 Series Only)
Drawer — This sets whether the drawers or LCF (not available for some countries or
regions) are installed.
Finisher — This sets whether or not optional finisher is installed.
Hole Punch Unit — This sets whether or not optional hole punch unit is installed.
Memory — Select the size of memory installed.
For more information about each item, see descriptions about the Configuration Tab.
3 Click [Drawer Settings].

y The Drawer Settings dialog box appears.

4 Set the following options and click [OK].
Drawer 1 — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the 1st
Drawer.
Drawer 2 — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the 2nd
Drawer.
Drawer 3 — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the 3rd
Drawer when it is installed.
Drawer 4 — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the 4th
Drawer when it is installed.
LCF — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is loaded in the LCF when it is
installed.
Bypass Tray — Select the paper type of paper that is loaded in the Bypass Tray.
Override Application Paper Settings — Check this to use the paper source setting in
the printer driver rather than the application setting.
5 Click [Apply] and [OK] to save settings.
Configuring the Options Automatically

The following describes an instruction on Windows XP. The procedure is the same when other
Setting the configuration tab using SNMP communication
lege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.
y When using Windows Vista
Then enter the administrator's password of the client computer to operate with an adminis-
trator's privilege.

1 Select the printer driver in the Printers and Faxes folder. Then click
[File] and select [Properties].
y When you are operating under Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/Vista, open the Printers
folder to access the printer driver.
2 Display the [Configuration] tab, check on “Enable SNMP Communi-

cation”, and click [Update Now].
y The printer driver starts communicating with system and obtains option settings auto-
matically.
If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly, the message “The
address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be displayed.
If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for the equipment using the TopAccessDocMon
Local Discovery dialog box. After searching the equipment, SNMP communication will
be enabled. For the instructions on how to search the equipment, refer to the instructions
of TopAccessDocMon.
P.348 “Finding the Printer Address”

3 If you want to update option settings automatically when the [Con-
figuration] tab is opened, select on “Update Automatically”.
For more information about each item, see descriptions about the Configuration Tab.
Setting the Department Code

When this equipment is managed by department codes, you have to enter your department
code on the printer driver.
This allows a network administrator to check the number of copies printed from specific depart-
ment members. Also users can check to see who submitted the print jobs, by using the Touch
Panel Display and monitoring tools.
Please ask your administrator whether or not you should enter the Department Code.
When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the User Management Set-
ting is used to manage the print jobs instead of the department code. In that case, the user
name that is entered to login to your computer is used for the authentication of the print job.
Therefore, you do not need to enter the department code in the printer driver but your user name
must be registered in the equipment. If the user name is not registered, your print job is pro-
cessed as the invalid job according to the Department Code Enforcement settings.

y How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no
department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator mode and
whether SNMP communication is enabled or not. When SNMP communication is enabled
and Department Code Enforcement is set to “ON”, an error message will be displayed when
entering an invalid department code. When SNMP communication is disabled and Depart-
ment Code Enforcement is set to “ON”, the invalid department code print job will be stored in
the invalid department code print job list without printing. When the Department Code
Enforcement is set to “Print”, the invalid department code print job will be printed. When the
Department Code Enforcement is set to “Delete”, the invalid department code print job will
be deleted without printing.
However, when using Windows NT 4.0 and configure the connection through a NetWare
print server, an error message for entering the invalid department code will not be displayed
even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Communication is enabled.
y A department code can be entered every time you begin printing. If you have to use a differ-
ent department code for each print job, enter it when you begin printing.
Entering department code
1 Select the printer driver in the Printers folder. Then click [File] and
select [Properties] (for Windows 98/Me), select [Document
Defaults...] (for Windows NT 4.0), or [Printing Preferences...] (for
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista).

2 Display the [Others] tab and enter your department code in the
“Department Code” field.
y In the Department field, only numeric characters can be entered. The Department
Code must be 5-digit number.
Copying the PPD File for Windows

The Client Utilities CD-ROM contains a printer description file for popular Windows applications.
PageMaker 6.0, 6.5, and 7.0 do not support automatic installation of printer description files. To
make printing available in the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes of this application, copy the
printer description file to the appropriate location.
Copying the printer description file
1 On the Client Utilities CD-ROM, open the folder that contains the
PS3 printer driver.
y For Windows 98/Me:
[Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>\
y For Windows NT 4.0:
[Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>\
y For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista:
[Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\W2K_XP_VISTA\PS\<language>\
y For Windows XP x64/Windows Vista x64
[Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\_XP_VISTA_X64\PS\<language>".
2 Copy the printer description file (*.ppd) to the appropriate location.

y For PageMaker 6.0:
\PM6\RSRC\<language>\PPD4
\PM65\RSRC\<language>\PPD4
\Program Files\Adobe\PageMaker 7.0\Rsrc\<language>\PPD4

Printing from Application

This section describes how to print a document from an application.
P.214 “Considerations and Limitations”
P.214 “How to Print”
Considerations and Limitations

y When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the user name that is
entered to login to your computer is used for the authentication of the print job. Therefore,
your user name must be registered in the equipment. If the user name is not registered, your
print job is processed as the invalid job according to the Department Code Enforcement set-
tings.
When the Windows Domain Authentication is used for the User Management Setting, your
computer must log in the domain.
y Some options listed in the printer driver can also be set from an application (for example, col-
lation). However, using collation in the application may cause problems. In that case, use
the driver option to perform the function, rather than setting it from the application. But
depending on the application, settings such as the orientation may need to be set in the
application, or the printer driver, or both. The application may not set up the file properly for
printing on this equipment and may also take longer to process. In order to print properly
from the application that you are using, please see the section about printing in the applica-
tion’s manual.
y When printing with the PS3 printer driver from Adobe Acrobat, the Fit to Paper enlargement
feature does not work if the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option is enabled in the PostScript
settings of the PS3 printer driver. To use the Fit to Paper enlargement feature, please dis-
able the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript settings of the PS3 printer
driver.
y When printing with the PS3 printer driver from the application that creates the PostScript
code for printing such as Adobe Acrobat, the following print options may not work correctly.
In that case, please disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript set-
tings of the PS3 printer driver.
- Manual Scale
- Print Paper Size
- Paper Type
- Use Front Cover
- Use Back Cover
- Interleave Pages
- Insert Pages
- Booklet
- Multiple Pages per Sheet
- All options in the Effect tab
- All options in the Image Quality tab
How to Print
Once you have installed the printer driver and configured it properly, you can print directly from
most Windows applications. Simply choose the Print command from within your application.
You can print using the various functions by setting print options on the printer driver.
Printing from Windows applications
The following describes an example for printing from NotePad on Windows XP.
1 Open a file and select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
y The Print dialog box appears.
214 Printing from Application

2 Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and Click
[Preferences].
y The Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
The procedures for displaying the properties dialog for the printer driver may be different
depending on an application that you are using. See your application’s manual about displaying
the printer properties dialog box.
3 Setting the Print Options for each tab according to how you want to
print.
y Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a document.
P.221 “Print Options”
y You can also set the print options using setting profiles.
P.218 “Setting Print Options Using Profiles”
4 Click [OK] to save the settings.
Printing from Application 215

5 Click [Print] to print a document.
216 Printing from Application

Setting Up Print Options
Print Options are the attributes you set to define the way a print job is processed. For example,
the private print and proof print options determine how the copier manages your print job.
To find the printing instructions for your specific needs, refer to the procedures in the following
section.
P.249 “Printing with Extended Print Functionality”
How to Setup
There are several ways to set print options. Also, how the settings effect printing varies depend-
ing on the way you set the options. Also the tabs displayed vary depending on how you display
the printer properties.
Setting Initial Values of Print Options

Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Printers folder within the
Windows Start menu will establish the initial values of the options. For example, the paper size
setting you most commonly use, optional device settings, user information settings, etc., are set-
tings you will not want to change every time you print. It is convenient to set these options as ini-
tial values.
How to display: Windows Vista
1 Click [Start], [Control Panel], [Hardware and Sound] and select

[Printers].
2 Select the printer driver for the equipment and click the “Select
printing preferences” button.
How to display: Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
1 Click [Start], [Settings], and select [Printers and Faxes].
2 Select the printer driver for the equipment, click the [File] menu and
select [Printing Preferences].
How to display: Windows NT 4.0
1 Click [Start], [Settings], and select [Printers].
select [Document Defaults].
How to display: Windows 98/Me
1 Click [Start], [Settings], and select [Printers].
select [Properties].
Setting Up Print Options 217

Setting Print Options for Each Print Job

Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Print dialog box within an
application will establish the values for the current print job. The print option settings specific to
each print job are set using this method.
How to display:
1 Click the [File] menu and select [Print] on an application.
2 Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and Click

[Properties].
Setting Print Options Using Profiles

Print option settings can be saved so you can easily load specifically configured settings for a
particular job.
There are several profiles that has been registered as default.
In order to print a document using profiles, you should create the saved profile first.
P.218 “Saving profile”
Once you save profile, you can load the settings for a particular job to print a document.
P.220 “Loading profile”
You can also delete the profile that you no longer require.
P.220 “Deleting profile”
Saving profile
You can create up to 20 profiles for a printer driver.
1 Configure the print options on each tab.

y Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a document.
218 Setting Up Print Options

2 Click [Save Profile] at the Profile group.
y The Profile Name dialog box appears.
3 Enter the profile name and click [OK].
y The file name can be up to 63 characters long.
y If you enter the existing profile name, it prompts whether overwrite the existing profile
or not. If you want to overwrite the existing profile, click [OK].
y You can not specify “None” for the profile name.
4 The setting profile is saved.

Loading profile
1 Select a profile in the “Profile” drop down menu.
y The settings profile is loaded from the file and apply to the printer options.
Selecting “None” in the “Profile” drop down menu cannot restore the initial settings on the
printer driver. To restore the initial settings after selecting a profile, click [Restore
Defaults].
Deleting profile
1 Select a profile that you want to delete in the “Profile” drop down
menu, and click [Delete].
y The Confirm Profile Delete dialog box appears.

2 Click [Yes] to delete the selected profile.
Print Options
This section describes print options in each tab of the printer driver. This section will help you to
find the description of specific print options, or understand the functions for each print option.
1
2
3
7 8 9 10
1) Printer Name
Displays the name given to the printer driver when it was installed, or the name it displays on
the icon in the Printer folder.
2) Menu Tabs
The menu items of the printer driver are displayed as tabs. Clicking on a tab will display the
contents of the selected tab. The tabs displayed vary depending on the way the print proper-
ties are displayed.
- Basic Tab
The Basic tab contains basic print operation settings, such as original paper size, print
paper size, paper source, paper type, orientation, number of copies, and so on.
P.224 “Basic Tab”
- Finishing Tab
The Finishing tab allows you to enable sort printing, stapling and punching, 2-sided print-
ing, and N-up printing.
P.227 “Finishing Tab”
- Paper Handling Tab
The Paper Handling Tab contains Cover page printing.
P.233 “Paper Handling Tab”
- Image Quality Tab
The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed. You can easily
select appropriate image quality depending on the type of job being printed.
P.237 “Image Quality Tab”

- Effect Tab
The Effect Tab contains print options that add the effects to your print jobs such as Water-
marks, Overlay Image printing and so on.
P.238 “Effect Tab”
- Others Tab
The Others Tab contains special features such as toner save, custom pager size, and so
on.
P.242 “Others Tab”
- Fonts Tab
The Fonts Tab allows you to select how the TrueType fonts are printed. This tab is only
displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder.
P.244 “Fonts Tab”
- Configuration Tab
The Configuration Tab allows you to configure the options. When any optional unit is
installed in this equipment, set the configuration of the machine on this tab. This tab is
only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder.
P.246 “Configuration Tab”
3) Print Job
This sets the type of print job.
- Normal Print
Select this to print a job normally.
- Scheduled Print
Select this to print a job at a future date and time.
When this is selected, click the button at the right to set the date and time to print a job.
- Private Print
Select this to print a private job. When you select this, enter a password using the alpha-
numeric characters and symbol characters (ASCII code characters between 0x21 to
0x7E) in the Password field that is displayed after the print settings have been made and
the print job is sent. The password must be between 1 and 63 characters.
The print job, sent as a private job, is saved in the private job queue on this equipment,
and is not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option is
useful when you want to print a confidential document that is secured by a password.
The user has to enter the password to print the private job when activating printing from
the Touch Panel Display.
- Proof Print
Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval before print-
ing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job, is saved in the proof job
queue on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until you activate
printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option allows you to check a job’s output
before printing the remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste.
When printing from an application that sends a separate job for each number of copies, this
equipment will print all copies even if you set the Proof Print. In that case, set one copy for
the number of copies for a proof print job in the printer driver, and then change the number of
copies from the Control Panel to print required copies of the print job.
- Print to Overlay File

Select this to save the print job as an overlay file that is imposed on other documents.
When you select this, click the button at the right and enter the file name.
For example, if you want to print a master page image on the background of a document,
you can create an overlay file of the master merge image using this option. Then you
can print a document using this overlay by specifying this file as an overlay image in the
“Overlay Image” option of the Effect tab.

y If the print job has several pages in the document, only the first page of the document will
be saved as an overlay file.
y Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image
must be created at the same size.
y When creating an overlay file using the PS3 printer driver from an application that can
create the PS command directly, the overlay file will not be created properly. In that case,
disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript Settings dialog box.
P.244 “PostScript Settings”
- Store to e-Filing
Select this to save a job to an e-Filing box. When this is selected, select the box from the
drop down menu after the print setting has been finished. When the SNMP commutation
is enabled, it detects the available box numbers and Box name in the drop down menu.
If not, all box numbers are listed in the drop down menu.
If you select a user box, you may be required to enter the appropriate password for the
selected box. The job saved to a box can be printed from the Touch Panel Display at a
later time. It can also be composed with other documents using the e-Filing web utility.
You can also print a job and save it to a box by checking on the “Print” option.
When you store a document in e-Filing using the printer driver, the printing image (not the
original document in your computer) will be stored in e-Filing.
For more information about e-Filing operations, see e-Filing Guide.
4) Preview window
In the Preview windows, you can check the current settings in the printer driver. You can
change view type by clicking [Graphic] to display the print options settings graphically or
[Text] to display the print options settings as a texts.
5) Profile
Print option settings can be saved on your hard disk. You can save print option settings by
clicking [Save Profile] and easily load a setting file by selecting a profile name in the drop
down menu.
P.218 “Setting Print Options Using Profiles”
There are several profiles that has been registered as default.
6) [Restore Defaults]
Click this to restore the settings to the original factory defaults.
7) [OK]
Click this to enter the input settings and complete the print options settings.
8) [Cancel]
Click this to cancel the input settings and exit the print options settings.
9) [Apply]
Click this to enter the input settings without closing the print options settings. This button is
only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers folder for Windows
NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. This button remains
grayed out until a setting is changed.

10) [Help]
Click this to browse the HELP for the printer driver.
Basic Tab
The Basic tab contains basic print operation settings, such as original paper size, print paper
size, paper source, paper type, orientation, number of copies, and so on.
1
2
3
1) Original Paper Size

This selects the size of a document to be printed.
Available original paper sizes are listed below:
y Letter y A4 y Envelope COM10

y Legal y A5 y Envelope Monarch
y Ledger y A3 y Envelope DL
y Statement y B4 y Envelope Cho-3
y Computer y B5 y Envelope You-4
y 13”LG y Folio
y 8.5”SQ y A6
y 16K
y 8K
y The default paper size will be “Letter” or “A4” according to the regional setting in the Win-
dows.
y “Envelope COM10”, “Envelope Monarch”, “Envelope DL”, “Envelope Cho-3”, and “Enve-
lope You-4” are only available for e-STUDIO282 Series.
2) Print Paper Size

Select this to enlarge or reduce a page image to fit exactly in the selected paper size. If you
do not wish to enable enlarge or reduce printing, select “Same as Original Size”.
Also when you want to enable Tab printing, select “Letter Tab” or “A4 Tab” here. When you
select “Letter Tab” or “A4 Tab”, the Primary Tab dialog box appears.

— Primary Tab Dialog
Tab Manufacturer
Select the product name of the tab paper that you use. This equipment supports following
tab paper.
For Letter Tab: Blanks USA copy Tabs (5 Banks) LT + 1/2” Tab
Blanks USA copy Tabs (8 Banks) LT + 1/2” Tab
For A4 Tab: KOKUYO A4-S (5 Banks)

King JIM A4-S (5Banks)
If you use tab papers other than above, select “Custom”. When you select “Custom”, you
must specify the tab extension manually.
Tab Extension
Enter the width of the tab extension. This must be set only when “Custom” is selected in the
“Tab Manufacturer” option.
Image Shift Width
Enter the width to shift the printed image.
For example, if you want to print text on the tab extension of Letter Tab paper, create a Letter
sized document and input the text on the right side. You must place the text at the exact
height to fit the tab extension. Also the right margin, the margin between the text and right
edge of the document, must have more than 0.2 inch or 5 mm space because the equipment
cannot print in the space. Then enter the width of the tab extension as Image Shift Width.
Width of Tab Extension = Image Shift Margin
More than 0.2" or 5mm
Document Printed Image
Tab Text
Tab Text
Must exactly
fit the tab extension
Units
Select the unit for the Tab Extension and Image Shift option. The default unit varies depend-
ing on the regional setting of the client computer.

y When you place the tab paper on the Bypass Tray, make sure the tab side of the paper
becomes outside.
Place the tab paper

so that the tab side
becomes outside.
y If the document for tab printing is not created properly or the Image Shift Width is not set
properly, the image will not be printed in the correct position within the tab extension.
Please make sure to create the document and set the Image Shift Width correctly.
y If mis-printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously, dirt may adhere
to the reverse side of a paper. To avoid this, it is recommended to print a tab paper as a
separated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning before printing
next tab paper.
y When printing tab paper, the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray
because the roller to deliver the tab extension does not exit. In that case, remove the tab
paper before printing a next job.
3) Manual Scale
Check this box to manually enter the zoom ratio, to enlarge or reduce an image. The repro-
duction ratio can be set at between 25 and 400%. This function cannot be used when
Drawer or LCF is selected for the Paper Source or the Magazine sort function is enabled.
4) Paper Source
This selects the paper source. Please select a paper source that correlates with the printing
size.
- Automatic — Automatically selects the paper set in this equipment according to the
printed document size.
- Drawer 1 — Paper is fed from the 1st Drawer.
- Drawer 2 — Paper is fed from the 2nd Drawer. This cannot be selected if the Drawer 3
and 4 are not installed.
- Drawer 3 — Paper is fed from the 3rd Drawer. This cannot be selected if the Drawer 3
- Drawer 4 — Paper is fed from the 4th Drawer. This cannot be selected if the Drawer 3
- LCF — Paper is fed from the LCF. This cannot be selected if the LCF is not installed.
- Bypass Tray — Paper is fed from the Bypass Tray. When this is selected and print a job,
the [JOB STATUS] button of the equipment will be blink. Press the [JOB STATUS] button
and check the paper size of the job. Then set the paper and press the [STRAT] button to
print a job.

y The selectable values vary depending on the optional devices installed on this equipment
and their configuration on the Configuration tab.
y When the paper size settings on the Configuration tab are differ from the paper size set-
tings in the equipment, the paper source setting is ignored and the equipment may
prompt to set the paper in the bypass tray.

5) Paper Type
This sets the media type of the paper.
- Plain — Select this when printing on 20 lbs plain paper (64-80 g/m2 plain paper).
- Thick1 — Select this when printing on 24-28 lbs thick paper (81-105 g/m2 thick paper).
- Thick2 — Select this when printing on 32-90 lbs thick paper (106-163 g/m2 thick paper).
- Thick3 — Select this when printing on 110 lbs thick paper (164-209 g/m2 thick paper).
- Transparency — Select this when printing on transparent sheets.
6) Number of Copies
This sets the number of printed copies. You can set any integer from 1 to 999.
7) Orientation
This sets the paper printing direction.
- Portrait — The document is printed in the portrait direction.
- Landscape — The document is printed in the landscape direction.
Finishing Tab
The Finishing tab allows you to enable sort printing, 2-sided printing, N-up printing, stapling and
punching.
4
5
1) Copy Handling
This sets how to sort the printed sheet when numerous copies are made for printing.
- Sort Copies — Select this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...).
- Group Copies — Select this for group-printing (1, 1, 1... 2, 2, 2... 3, 3, 3...).

- Rotated Sort Copies — Select this for rotate sort-printing.
y “Group Copies” and “Rotated Sort Copies” can be selected only when more than 2 cop-
ies are entered at the Number of Copies option.
y “Rotated Sort Copies” can be selected only when “Letter”, “A4”, “B5”, or “16K” is selected
at the Output Paper Size option. When you want to use the “Rotated Sort Copies”
option, you must set Letter/Letter-R paper, A4/A4-R paper, B5/B5-R paper, or 16K/16K-R
paper in the cassettes before printing. The job will be output in the inner tray.
2) 2-Sided Printing
This sets 2-Sided printing (printing on both sides of paper) according to the type of binding
for 2-sided-printed pages.
This option is only for printing on both sides of the paper. If you want to bind the output with
staples, you should set the finishing option as well.
- None — Select this if you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.
- Book — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in the same direction and to bind
the document along the vertical side of the paper so that the pages can be turned over
right and left.
Portrait Landscape
1
2
1
2
- Tablet — Select this to print on both sides of the paper with a vertical reversal and to bind
the document along the horizontal side of the paper so that the pages can be turned over
up and down.
Portrait Landscape
1
1
2
2
- Booklet — Select this to print a properly paginated booklet or magazine-style publica-

tion. When this is selected, click [Details...] to specify the detail of the Booklet printing.

y 2-Sided printing cannot be set when the following paper size in selected at the “Print
Paper Size” drop down menu in the Basic Tab.
- A5
- A6
- A4 Tab
- Letter Tab
y 2-Sided printing cannot be set when the following paper type in selected at the “Paper
Type” drop down menu in the Basic Tab.
- Transparency
y When Booklet printing is performed using the PS3 printer driver from an application that
can create the PS command directly, the overlay image will not be printed. In that case,
y “Book” or “Tablet” will be automatically selected when the Booklet printing is set at the
Layout tab.
y For e-STUDIO282 Series, “None” can only be selected when no Automatic Duplexing
Unit is installed.
— Booklet Details
In the Booklet Details dialog box, you can specify how Booklet printing is performed.
Output Document Layout

Select the booklet size to be made.
- A5 on A4 — Select this to print a A5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on A4
paper to fit on half a sheet (A5).
- B5 on B4 — Select this to print a B5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on B4
paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).
- Letter-Half on Letter — Select this to print a 1/2 Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are
printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet.
- LT on LD — Select this to print a Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on Led-
ger paper to fit on half a sheet (Letter).
- B6 on B5 — Select this to print a B6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on B5
- 1/2 LG on LG — Select this to print a 1/2 Legal size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet.

- 1/2 Comp on Comp — Select this to print a 1/2 Computer size booklet. Every 2 pages
are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 Folio on Folio — Select this to print a 1/2 Folio size booklet. Every 2 pages are
printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 Statement on Statement — Select this to print a 1/2 Statement size booklet. Every
2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 13’LG on 13’LG — Select this to print a 1/2 13inchLG size booklet. Every 2 pages
are printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 8.5’SQ on 8.5’SQ — Select this to print a 1/2 8.5inchSQ size booklet. Every 2 pages
are printed on 8.5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 32K on 16K — Select this to print a 32K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on 16K
paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 16K on 8K — Select this to print a 16K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on 8K
In page of the order - From Left to Right
Select this to print the pages from left to right.
In page of the order - From Right to Left
Select this to print the pages from right to left.
Margin - Center
This sets the gutter on the center of two sided page. You can enter up to 0.500 inch (12.700
mm). The printed images will be reduced according to the margin setting.
Margin - Outer
This sets the gutter on the right side and left side on the paper. You can enter up to 1.00 inch
(25.40 mm). The printed images will be reduced according to the margin setting.
Units
Select the unit for the Center Margin and Outer Margin option. The default unit varies
depending on the regional setting in the Windows.
Staple Down the Center
Check this to staple double in the center.
“Staple Down the Center” is available only when “A5 on A4”, “A4 on A3”, “B5 on B4”, “Letter
- Half on Letter”, “LT on LD”, “1/2 LG on LG”, or “16K on 8K” is selected at the Output Docu-
ment Layout drop down menu and the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed.
3) Number of pages per sheet

This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit the
selected paper size automatically and printed.
- 2 pages — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet.
Direction of print
This sets how the pages are arranged on one sheet.
- Left to Right — Select this to arrange pages horizontally from the left and printed top to
bottom on one sheet.
- Right to Left — Select this to arranged pages horizontally from the right and printed top
to bottom on one sheet.
- Left to Right by column — Select this to arrange pages vertically from the top and
printed left to right on one sheet.

- Right to Left by column — Select this to arrange pages vertically from the top and
printed right to left on one sheet.
Draw Borders Around Pages
Check this to print borders around each page.
4) Staple
This sets whether a print job is printed with staples.
- Upper Left — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper left.
- Upper Right — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper right.
- Center Top — Select this to staple the printed document double along the top edge.
- Middle Left — Select this to staple the printed document double along the left side.
- Center Double — Select this to fold and staple the printed document double in the cen-
ter. When you select this, the pages will be printed on the sheets according to the print
option settings, and then simply fold and staple double in the center of the sheets.
“Center Double” can be used to create a booklet from a document that has been already cre-
ated as a paginated booklet. To create a paginated booklet from a normal document, per-
form the booklet printing in the 2-Sided Printing option.

y The selectable options vary depending on the paper size.

y “Center Double” can be selected only when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed.
y 2-Sided printing cannot be set when the following paper size in selected at the “Print
Paper Size” drop down menu in the Basic Tab.
- A5
- A6
- Statement
- A4 Tab
- Letter Tab
5) Hole Punch
This sets whether a print job is printed with hole punches.
- Center Top — Select this to create holes along the top edge and print.
- Middle Left — Select this to create holes along the left side and print.
Hole punching can be selected only when a hole punch unit is installed.
6) Use Custom Margin

Check this to set the margin on the printed pages. When this is checked, click [Detail...] to
set the margins in the Custom Margin dialog box.
The margin range is between 5 mm and 100 mm. Less than 5 mm cannot be set for the
range.
y Enable this function to add the margins if the application does not support the margin
function. When the application has the margin function, use the application’s function
rather than this option.
y This cannot specify the binding margin for Booklet printing.

Paper Handling Tab
The Paper Handling tab allows you to enable Front Cover printing, Back Cover printing, Insert-
ing Pages, and Interleaving Pages.
1) Destination
This selects the destination tray to which jobs will be output.
- Inner Tray — Select this to route the output to the inner tray.
- Tray 1 — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher.
- Tray 2 — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher.
- Job Separator Upper — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Job Sep-
arator.
- Job Separator Lower — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Job Sep-
arator.
y For e-STUDIO452 Series, “Tray 1” and “Tray 2” can be selected when the Hanging Fin-
isher, Finisher (Type A), Finisher (Type B), or Saddle Stitch Finisher are installed and
configured on the Configuration tab.
y When the Finisher (Type B) is installed in the e-STUDIO452 Series and stapling is
enabled, “Tray 1” cannot be selected.
isher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab, and “Tray 1” can be selected
when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed and configured on the Configuration tab.
y If you select “Rotated Sort Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down menu in the Setup
tab, only “Inner Tray” can be selected.
y When the optional Job Separator is installed and configured on the Configuration tab,
you can select “Job Separator Upper” and “Job Separator Lower” instead of “Inner Tray”.
2) Use Front Cover

This sets front cover printing which allows you to insert or print a cover on a sheet fed from a
different Drawers or Bypass tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Basic tab.
To enable cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a cover sheet
is to be fed and the print style to be used.
Source
Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed. When “Auto” is selected, the paper
is automatically selected according to the printed document size.

The selectable values in the Source drop down menu vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.
Print Style
This selects how you want to print a cover.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.
- Print on 1 side of the page — Select this to print the first page image on the front side of
a cover.
- Print both sides of page — Select this to print the first two page images on both sides of
a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is enabled on the Finish-
ing tab.
If “Print on 1 side of the page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the first page
is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and the back side of the cover will be blank.
3) Use Back Cover

This sets back cover printing which allows you to insert or print a back cover on a sheet fed
from a different Drawers or Bypass tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Basic
tab.
To enable back cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a back
cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used.
Source
Select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed. When “Auto” is selected, the
paper is automatically selected according to the printed document size.
Print Style
This selects how you want to print a back cover.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.
- Print on 1 side of the page — Select this to print the last page image on the front side of
a cover.
- Print both sides of page — Select this to print the last two page images on both sides of
a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is enabled on the Finish-
ing tab.
y If “Print on 1 side of the page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the last
page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be
blank.
y If “Print both sides of page” is selected but there is only one page printed on the back
cover, the last page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the
cover will be blank.

4) Insert Pages
This sets sheet insertion printing which allows you to insert a sheet between pages, or print a
specific page on a sheet fed from a tray other than the Paper Source option selected on the
Basic tab.
This option is useful when you want to insert a blank sheet between chapters, or when you
want to print chapter cover pages on the different paper.
To enable sheet insertion printing, check on the box and click [Edit...] to set how the pages
are inserted in the Insert Pages dialog box.
y This option cannot be set when “Interleave Pages” option is enabled.

y Up to 50 pages can be inserted.
y When Insert Pages printing is performed using the PS3 printer driver from an application
that can create the PS command directly, the overlay image will not be printed. In that
case, disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript Settings dialog
box.
— Insert Pages
Page
Enter the page number where the sheet is to be inserted.
When “Blank” is selected from the Print Style drop down menu, the blank sheet is inserted
before the entered pages.
When “1 Side” is selected from the Print Style drop down menu, the entered page will be
printed on the inserted sheet.
A sheet cannot be inserted before the first page when 2-Sided printing is enabled.
Print Style
This selects how you want to print on insertion sheets.
- Blank — Select this to insert blank sheets.
- 1 Side — Select this to print the specified page on the front side of the insertion sheets.
- 2 Sides — Select this to print the specified page and the next page on the both sides of
the insertion sheets.
Paper Source
Select the location from where insertion sheets are to be fed. When “Auto” is selected, the
paper is automatically selected according to the printed document size.

The selectable values in the Paper Source drop down menu vary depending on the optional
Paper Type
Select the paper type to be inserted.
y If “Blank” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and you enter an even num-
bered page (printed on the back side of the paper) for the Pages field, the specified page
will be blank. The desired blank sheet is inserted next and the 2-sided printing continues
from the next page.
4
5
3
1
y If “1 Side” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, the specified page is printed on
the front side of the sheet and back side of the sheet will be blank.
4
5
3
1
y If “1 Side” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and you enter an even num-
will be blank. The page is printed on the front side of the inserted sheet and the 2-sided
printing continues from the next page.
5
6
4
3
1
y If “2 Sides” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and you enter an even num-
will be blank. The specified page and the next page are printed on the inserted sheet and
the 2-sided printing continues from the next page.
6
7
4
5
34
5
1

5) Interleave Pages
This sets the interleaving page feature that is useful when you want to insert paper of a dif-
ferent type (or from another source) between every page of your print job. For example, you
could use this option to insert blank, colored sheets between overhead transparencies.
To enable interleaving pages, check on the box and select the location from where sheets
are to be fed.
y When this option is enabled as well as the “Use Front Cover” and “Use Back Cover”
options enabled, no page is inserted after the front cover and back cover.
y This option cannot be set when “Insert Pages” option is enabled.
Source
Select the location from where the interleaving sheet is to be fed. When “Auto” is selected,
the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document size.
Duplicate
When you check on this, you can print previous page images on the inserted sheet.
Image Quality Tab

The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed. You can easily select
appropriate image quality depending on the type of document.
2
3
4
1) Halftone
This sets how halftone are printed.
For PCL6 printer driver, the following value can be set.
- Detail — Select this to print halftone in detail.
- Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.
For PS3 printer driver, the following values can be set.

- Auto — Select this to print using proper halftone depending on the contents in the docu-
ment automatically. When this is selected, the halftone is printed in detail for the texts,
and smoothly for the graphics.
2) Smoothing
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.
3) Distinguish Thin Lines
Check this to print thin lines clearly.
4) Use Black for All Texts
Check this to print all texts in 100% black except white texts.
Effect Tab
The Effect Tab contains print options that add effects to your print jobs such as Watermarks,
Overlay Image printing, Rotate printing, Mirror printing, and Negative printing.
Effect Tab for PCL6

Effect Tab for PS3
3
4
5
1) Watermark
This selects the watermark to be used or edited. The following values except “None” are the
default watermarks that have been registered in the printer driver. New watermarks you cre-
ate are added to the drop down menu list.
- None — Select this if no watermark is desired.
The following default watermarks are also displayed in the drop down menu:
- TOP SECRET
- CONFIDENTIAL
- DRAFT
- ORIGINAL
- COPY
[Add]
Click this to create new watermark. The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking on this.
P.241 “Add/Edit Watermark”
[Edit]
Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down menu and click it to edit the watermark.
The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking on this.
P.241 “Add/Edit Watermark”
[Delete]
Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down menu and click it to delete a watermark.
y The default watermarks can be deleted but, If deleted, they cannot be restored.
y “None” cannot be deleted.
Print on First Page Only

Check this to print a watermark on the first page only. This setting will become available
when any watermark is selected from the Watermark drop down menu.
2) Overlay Image
This selects an overlay image to be used. This feature allows you to print an image on the
background of a print job, although the watermark allows only text.

y If the print job has several pages in the document, only the first page of the document will
be saved as an overlay file.
y Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image
must be created at the same size orientation.
y When printing with Overlay Image using the PS3 printer driver from an application that
can create the PS command directly, the overlay image will not be printed. In that case,
If you want to use an overlay image in your job, you must first create an overlay file. To cre-
ate an overlay image, create an overlay image with most applications and print it as an over-
lay file. You can enable creating an overlay file on the Print Job drop down menu.
[Delete]
Click this to delete the overlay image that you select in the drop down menu.
Print over the document
Check this to print overlay image over the document.
3) Rotate 180 degrees
Check on this to perform rotation printing of an image.
4) Mirror
Check on this to perform mirror printing of an image. This print option is available only for
the PS3 printer driver.
y The mirror printing may not be applied when the application gives priority to the applica-
tion’s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings.
y When printing from Adobe Acrobat or similar applications, the mirror printing does not
work if the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option is enabled in the PostScript settings. To
use the mirror printing, please disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the
PostScript Settings dialog box.
5) Negative/Positive
Check on this to perform negative printing of an image. This print option is available only for
the PS3 printer driver.
y Negative printing may not be applied when the application gives priority to the applica-
tion’s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings.
y When printing from Adobe Acrobat or similar applications, Negative/Positive printing
does not work if the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option is enabled in the PostScript set-
tings. To use Negative/Positive printing, please disable the “Use PostScript
Passthrough” option in the PostScript Settings dialog box.

— Add/Edit Watermark
When you click [Add] or [Edit], the Watermark dialog box appears and you can create new
watermark or edit selected watermarks.
5
6
7
8
1 10
2 11
12
3
1) X Position
The horizontal position of a watermark is displayed. You can change the position using the
horizontal scroll bar.
2) Y Position
The vertical position of a watermark is displayed. You can change the position using the ver-
tical scroll bar.
3) Units
Select the unit for the “X Position” and “Y Position” field.
4) [Center Watermark]
Click this to automatically move the watermark position to the center.
5) Caption
Enter the text of a watermark. You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters. When you
are editing a watermark, the selected watermark text is displayed in the field.
6) Font Name
Select the font to be used for the watermark text.
7) Style
Select the font style for the watermark text.
- Regular — Select this to set the regular style to the text.
- Bold — Select this to set the bold style to the text.
- Italic — Select this to set the italic style to the text.
- Bold Italic — Select this to set the bold and italic style to the text.
8) Font Size
Enter the font size for the watermark text. The font size can be set from 6 to 300 pt in units of
1 pt.
9) Angle
Enter the degree of angle for rotating the watermark text. The angle can be set from -90 to
90 degrees in units of 1 degree. You can also set the degree of angle by moving the scroll
bar.
10) Solid
Select this to print solid type of watermark.

11) Draw as Outline

Select this to print outline type of watermark.
12) Transparency
Select this to print a transparent watermark. When you select this, set the brightness from 0
(darker) to 100% (lighter) in units of 1%. You can also set the brightness using the scroll bar.
Others Tab
The Others tab contains print options such as toner saving, custom paper size and so on.
Others Tab for PCL6
2
3
4
6
7
Others Tab for PS3
2
3
4
5
6
7
1) Default Menu Setting

Select the default tab that is displayed when opening the properties of printer driver.
2) Toner Save
Check this to print in toner save mode.

When the toner save mode is enabled, printing may become light.
3) Do not Print Blank Pages

Check this ignore blank pages for printing.
If Watermark feature is enabled all pages will be printed even when the content is blank.
The pages that the header or footer exists will be printed even if the content are blank.
4) [PostScript Settings]
Click this to specify the PostScript specific functions. The PostScript Settings dialog box
appears by clicking this. This print option is available only for the PS3 printer driver.
5) Department
Enter the user’s department code if the system is managed with department codes. Please
ask your administrator for your department code.
y When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the User Manage-
ment Setting is used to manage the print jobs instead of the department code. In that
case, the user name that is entered to login to your computer is used for the authentica-
tion of the print job. Therefore, you do not need to enter the department code in the
printer driver but your user name must be registered in the equipment. If the user name is
not registered, your print job is processed as the invalid job according to the Department
Code Enforcement settings.
y If the number of the printed sheets for a print job exceeds the output limitation for the
entered department code, the print job is stored in the invalid department code print job
list without printing. When you want to print the print job, perform printing from the [JOB
STATUS] button in the Control Panel by entering another department code for which the
output limitation is more than the number of printed sheets.
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no
ment Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator mode and
whether SNMP Communication is enabled or not. When SNMP Communication is enabled
and Department Code Enforcement is set to “ON”, an error message will be displayed when
entering an invalid department code. When SNMP Communication is disabled and Depart-
ment Code Enforcement is set to “ON”, the invalid department code print job will be stored in
the invalid department code print job list without printing. When the Department Code
Enforcement is “Print”, the invalid department code print job will be printed. When the
Department Code Enforcement is “Delete”, the invalid department code print job will be
deleted without printing.
However, when using Windows NT 4.0 and configure the connection through a NetWare
print server, an error message for entering the invalid department code will not be displayed
even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Communication is enabled.
6) [Version Information]
Click this to display the Version Information dialog box.

— PostScript Settings
1
2
3
4
1) Output Format
This selects the output format for printing.
- ASCII — The job is sent in ASCII data format.
- Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) — The job is sent in EPS format.
- Tagged BCP — Select this to send a job in Tagged Binary format over parallel ports.
- Using Adobe DSC — Select this to send a job with DSC comments.
The EPS format is usually used for creating an image to import into another document.
Therefore, only the first page of the document will be printed when “Encapsulated PostScript
(EPS)” is selected.
2) Print Error Information

Check on this to print a PS error information page when any errors occur for printing.
3) Compress Bitmap
Check on this to send compress bitmaps to this equipment.
4) Use PostScript Passthrough
Check this for PostScript data created by the application that creates the PostScript code for
printing (such as Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Photoshop, or Adobe Illustrator) to be passed
through to this equipment.
If this option is enabled, the following print options may not work correctly when printing from
the application that creates the PostScript code for printing such as Adobe Acrobat. In that
case, please disable this option for printing.
- Manual Scale
- Print Paper Size
- Paper Type
- Use Front Cover
- Use Back Cover
- Interleave Pages
- Insert Pages
- Booklet
- Multiple Pages per Sheet
- All options in the Effect tab
- All options in the Image Quality tab
Fonts Tab
The Fonts tab allows you to select how the TrueType fonts are printed. The following figure is
the Fonts Tab for the PS3 printer driver.

The Fonts tab can be displayed only from the Printers folder (and not displayed when displaying
the properties from the application’s Print dialog box).
When using Windows Vista

Then enter the administrator's password of the client computer to operate with an administrator's
privilege.
1) TrueType Options
This sets how to print TrueType fonts.
- Always Use TrueType Fonts — Select this to print the document the same as the print
image shown on the screen. All TrueType fonts are extracted on the system for printing.
- Always Use Printer Fonts — Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts with the inter-
nal fonts for printing. The print result may differ from the print image on the screen.
- Use Font Substitution Table — Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts using the
internal fonts according to the settings of the font substitution table. You can edit the font
substitution table that is displayed at the Substitution Table Edit table.
- Download as Bitmap — Select this to print the document as same as the image shown
on the screen.
y The default value will be “Always Use TrueType Fonts” for the PCL6 printer driver.
y The default value will be “Use Font Substitution Table” for the PS3 printer driver.
2) Substitution Table Edit

This table shows how each TrueType font is substituted. You can edit the substitution setting
for each TrueType font. In this table, the TrueType font names are displayed in the TrueType
Font column, and how the TrueType font is printed is shown in the Use Printer Font column.
To edit the substitution table, select the TrueType font that you want to edit from the table,
and select how the TrueType font is printed at the Printer Font For drop down menu.
At the Printer Font For drop down menu, you can select “Download as Soft Font” to send the
TrueType fonts in Type 42 format, or other available printer fonts to be substituted. The
printer fonts displayed in the drop down menu differ depending on the TrueType fonts.

3) [Run Font Manager]

Click this to run the Font Manager. This is not available if the Font Manager is not installed.
The [Run Font Manager] button is not displayed for the PCL6 printer driver.
Configuration Tab
The Configuration Tab allows you to configure options. When any optional unit is installed in this
equipment, set the configuration of the machine on this tab.
When using Windows Vista

Then enter the administrator's password of the client computer to operate with an administrator's
privilege.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1) Model Selection
This sets the model name of the equipment.
2) Automatic Duplexing Unit (e-STUDIO282 Series Only)
This sets whether or not the optional automatic duplexing unit is installed.
- None — Select this when the automatic duplexing unit is not installed.
- Installed — Select this when the automatic duplexing unit is installed.
3) Drawers
This sets whether or not the optional drawers or LCF is installed.
The selections vary depending on the equipment model.
- Drawer 1 & Drawer2 — Select this when the Drawer 1 and Drawer 2 are installed.
- Drawer 1,2 & LCF — Select this when the Drawer 1, Drawer 2 and LCF are installed.
- Drawer 1,2 & Drawer3 — Select this when the Drawer 1, Drawer 2 and Drawer 3 are
installed.
- Drawer1,2 & Drawer3,4 — Select this when the Drawer1, Drawer2, and drawer3,
Drawer4 are installed.
- Drawer 1 — Select this when the Drawer 1 is installed.

- Drawer 1 & LCF — Select this when the Drawer 1 and LCF are installed.
installed.
- Drawer 1,2 & LCF — Select this when the Drawer 1, Drawer 2 and LCF are installed.
installed.
- Drawer 1,2,3 & Drawer4 — Select this when the Drawer 1, Drawer2, Drawer 3 and
Drawer 4 are installed.
4) Finisher
This sets whether or not the optional finisher is installed.
The selections vary depending on the equipment model.
- None — Select this when finisher is not installed.
- Hanging Finisher — Select this when the Hanging Finisher is installed.
- Finisher (Type A) — Select this when the Finisher (Type A) is installed.
- Finisher (Type B) — Select this when the Finisher (Type B) is installed.
- Saddle Stitch Finisher — Select this when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed.
- Job Separator — Select this when the Job Separator is installed.
- Offset Stacker — Select this when the Offset Stacker is installed.
- None — Select this when finisher is not installed.
- Hanging Finisher — Select this when the Hanging Finisher is installed.
- Job Separator — Select this when the Job Separator is installed.
- Offset Stacker — Select this when the Offset Stacker is installed.
- Saddle Stitch Finisher — Select this when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed.
5) Hole Punch Unit
This sets whether or not the optional hole punch unit is installed.
- None — Select this when a hole punch unit is not installed.
- 2 Holes — Select this when a 2 hole punch unit is installed.
- 2/3 Holes — Select this when a 2/3 hole punch unit is installed.
- 4 Holes (F) — Select this when a 4 hole (F) punch unit is installed.
- 4 Holes (S) — Select this when a 4 hole (S) punch unit is installed.
6) Memory
Select the size of memory installed.
7) Enable SNMP Communication
Check this to enable obtaining the configuration information from this equipment.
If you disable SNMP Communication, TopAccessDocMon notification also will be disabled.
Update Automatically/Manual
Select whether or not to update the configuration information every time the printer driver is
opened. This is available only when “Enable SNMP Communication” is checked.

address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be displayed
when the Configuration tab is displayed. If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for the
equipment using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box. After searching the
equipment, SNMP communication will be enabled. For the instructions on how to search the
equipment, refer to the instructions of TopAccessDocMon.
P.350 “Searching for a Printer”
[Update Now]
Click this to obtain the configuration information from this equipment immediately. This is
available only when “Enable SNMP Communication” is checked.
address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be displayed
when you click [Update Now]. If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for the equipment
using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box. After searching the equipment,
SNMP communication will be enabled. For the instructions on how to search the equipment,
refer to the instructions of TopAccessDocMon.
8) [Drawer Settings]
Click this to set the paper size and paper type of each drawer. The Drawer Settings dialog
box appears by clicking this.
— Drawer Settings
Paper Size
Select the paper size set in each drawer.
Paper Type
Select the paper type set in each drawer.
Attribute
Select the attribute of the paper. When you set the attribute, the drawer will be selected pref-
erentially according to the print settings.
Override Application Paper Settings
Check this to use the paper source setting in the printer driver rather than the application set-
ting.
9) [Version Information]
Click this to display the Version Information dialog box.

Printing with Extended Print Functionality
In this section, procedures are given to print various types of print jobs, using the layout and fin-
ishing options.
Printing Various Print Job Types

The printer drivers provide various ways to handle such jobs as Scheduled Print, Private Print,
Proof Print, Overlay Image file, and Store to e-Filing.
Printing Scheduled Print Jobs

The Print Scheduling feature allows you to specify the date and time to print your job. This can
be especially useful for delaying printing until off-peak hours.
Printing on a specified date and time
1 Select “Scheduled Print” in the “Print Job” drop down menu.
2 Click [...].
y The Scheduled Time dialog box appears.
3 Click the arrow button at the “Date” drop down menu to display the
Calendar window, and select the desired date for your print job.
4 Select the Time field and click the spin button to change the time.
y To change the hour, select the hour number and click the spin button.
y To change the time, select the time number and click the spin button.
5 Click [OK].
y The specified date and time is displayed in the Time field.
6 Set any other print options you require and click [OK].
Printing with Extended Print Functionality 249

7 Click [OK] or [Print] to send the print job.

y The document will be queued to print at the specified time and date.
Printing Private Print Jobs

The private print feature permits sensitive or confidential documents to be printed only in the
presence of the person who sent the job.
Printing confidential documents
1 Select “Private Print” in the “Print Job” drop down menu.

y The print job is stored in the Private Job list in the Touch Panel Display.
4 Enter a password in the “Password” field and click [OK].
y Enter a password using the alphanumeric characters and symbol characters (ASCII
code characters between 0x21 to 0x7E) in the Password field. The password must
be between 1 to 63 characters.
y This number will be used to release the private job from the Touch Panel Display. If
you forget this number, you can no longer print the private print job.
y When the user authentication is enabled, printing can be performed without a pass-
word.
250 Printing with Extended Print Functionality

5 Press the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel.
y The print job list is displayed.
6 Press the [PRIVATE] button.
7 Select the appropriate user name and press the [PASSWORD] but-
ton.
y The letter entry menu is displayed. Key in the password, which has previously been
set from the client PC, and then press the [ENTER] button.
y You can key in the Admin Password by pressing the [ADMIN. PASSWORD] button
instead of keying in the password, previously set from the client PC. In this case, jobs
can be deleted but not printed.
y The private print job list is displayed.
If private print jobs are submitted using different password from the same user, the pri-
vate print job will be stored in the user name, but only the private print jobs of the entered
password will be displayed after you enter the password.

8 Select the job you want to print on the private print job list.
y If the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button
to switch the page.
y To select all jobs on the private print job list, press the [SELECT ALL] button. To clear
the selection, press the [ALL CLEAR] button.
9 Press the [RELEASE] button.
y Printing starts.
y The printing status can be confirmed on the print job list.
Printing Proof Print Jobs

The proof print feature prevents costly mistakes by allowing you to check the printed output on a
sample copy before printing an entire multi-copy job
When printing from an application that sends data separately for each number of copies, this
equipment will print all of the copies even if you set the Proof Print. In that case, set one copy
for the number of copies for a proof print job in the printer driver, and then change the number of
copies from the Control Panel to print required copies of the print job.
Printing a proof copy
1 Select “Proof Print” in the “Print Job” drop down menu.

y One copy of the document is printed and the print job is stored in the Proof Job list in
the Touch Panel Display.
4 Press the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel.
y The print job list is displayed.
5 Press the [PROOF] button.
y The proof print job list is displayed.
6 Select the job you want to print on the proof print job list.
y If the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button
to switch the page.

7 Press the [RELEASE] button.
y Printing starts.
y The printing status can be confirmed on the print job list.
When you want to change the number of sets

When you want to change the number of sets, press the [EDIT] button and key in the
desired number. Then press the [RELEASE] button to start printing.
Creating An Overlay File

You can print a document as an overlay file. The created overlay file can then be merged into
another document during printing.
P.270 “Printing with an Overlay File”
y If the print job has several pages in the document, only the first page of the document will be
saved as an overlay file.
y Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image must
be created at the same size, orientation.
y When creating an overlay file using the PS3 printer driver from an application that can create
the PS command directly, the overlay file will not be created properly. In that case, disable
the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript Settings dialog box.
Printing a document as an overlay file
1 Select “Print to Overlay File” in the “Print Job” drop down menu.

2 Click [...].
y The Overlay Image Name dialog box appears.
3 Enter a overlay image name and then click [OK].
y You can enter up to 63 characters.
y The Overlay Image Name dialog box appears.

y The document is saved as an overly file.
You can use created overly file to print a document.

P.270 “Printing with an Overlay File”
Storing to e-Filing
The Store to e-Filing feature allows you to send print jobs to e-Filing on this equipment. The job
stored to e-Filing can then be printed from the Touch Panel Display at a later time. It can be also
composed with other documents using the e-Filing web utility.
You can store a print job to either the public box or a user box. The public box is shared by all
users who can see the jobs stored in this box. A user box is for personal use and is protected by
password.
When you store a document in e-Filing using the printer driver, the printing image (not the origi-
nal document in your computer) will be stored in e-Filing.
y You can manage the files within a box from the Touch Panel Display. Please refer to the
Operator’s Manual for Basic Function to manage files in a box.
y You can also manage the files within a box using the e-Filing web utility. Please refer to the
e-Filing Guide.
Saving a print job to a public box
1 Select “Store to e-Filing” in the “Print Job” drop down menu.


y The print job is saved to a public box.
4 Select “Public Box” to save a print job to a public box.
5 If you print a job as well as saving to the public box, check the
“Print” box.
6 Click [OK].
Saving a print job to a user box
1 Select “Store to e-Filing” in the “Print Job” drop down menu.

y The print job is saved to a specified user box.
4 Select a user box to save a print job and enter the 5-digit password
for the user box in the “Password” field if required.
5 If you print a job as well as saving to a box, check the “Print” box.
6 Click [OK].
Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options

Printer drivers allows you to create a print job with layout options to make your document more
essential. Also you can enable finishing options that determine how the jobs are output, such as
stapling and hole punching, sorting, and creating a booklet.
Sort Printing
You can select how multiple copies of a document to be output, such as separately for each
copy, grouping each page, and alternating the paper direction for each copies.

Output each copy separately
1 Display the Basic tab and enter the number of copies to be printed
at the “Number of Copies” field.
2 Display the Finishing tab and select “Sort Copies” icon at “Copy
Handling”.

y The print job is output separately for each copy.
Output with grouping of each page within a set
For example, assume that you have a three page job (A, B, C) and you want three copies of
each page in this order (AAA, BBB, CCC).
2 Display the Finishing tab and select “Group Copies” icon at “Copy
Handling”.

y The print job is output separately for each page.
Output in a different direction for each copy
Rotated Sort Copies can be enabled only when printing on Letter, A4, B5, or 16K.

2 Display the Finishing tab and select “Rotated Sort” icon at “Copy
Handling”.

y The print job is output in different direction for each copy.
Enlarge/Reduce Printing
You can automatically enlarge or reduce a document image to fit a specified paper size, or man-
ually set the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce the image.
Printing enlarged or reduced image to fit specified paper size
1 Display the Basic tab and select the document size on the “Original
Paper Size” drop down menu. Then select the paper size that you
want to print at the “Print Paper Size” drop down menu.
y The document image is automatically enlarged or reduced depending on the original

paper size and print paper size.

y Enlarged or reduced image is printed to fit specified paper size.

Printing an enlarged or reduced image by specifying the zoom ratio
manually
1 Display the Basic tab and check the “Manual Scale” box. Then
enter the percentage of zoom ratio.
y The zoom ratio can be set from 25% to 400% in units of 1%.

y Enlarged or reduced image is printed by specified zoom ratio.
Stapling and Hole Punching

You can staple and punch the paper.
y Stapling is not available if a finisher is not installed.

y Hole Punching is not available if a hole punch unit is not installed.
Stapling the paper
1 Display the Finishing tab and check the “Staple” check box. Then
select how to staple.
Upper Left — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper left.
Upper Right — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper right.
Center Top — Select this to staple the printed document double along the top edge.
Middle Left — Select this to staple the printed document double along the left side.
Center Double — Select this to fold and staple the printed document double in the
center.
y The selectable options vary depending on the paper size.

y “Center Double” can be selected only when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed and
configured on the Configuration tab.

y The output is stapled for each copy.

Punching holes
1 Display the Finishing tab and check the “Hole Punch” check box.
Then select how to hole punching.
Center Top — Select this to create holes along the top edge.
Middle Left — Select this to create holes along the left side.

y The output is hole punched.

Printing on Both Sides of a Sheet
You can print on both sides of the paper.
Printing both sides of paper
1 Display the Finishing tab, check the “2-Sided Printing” check box
and select the direction to be printed.
Book — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in a vertical direction, so the pages
can be bound and turned over right and left.
Tablet — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in a vertical reversal motion, so
the pages can be bound and turned over up and down.
You can also set booklet printing at the “2-Sided Printing” option by selecting the “Book-
let” icon. For the instructions on how to perform booklet printing, see the following sec-
tion.
P.264 “Printing Booklets”

y The print job is printed on both sides of paper in the specified direction.
Printing or Inserting Sheets from Different Paper Sources

You can print paper for covers, back covers, or for insert between pages by feeding from differ-
ent paper sources. This is useful when you want to print or insert a color cover and color sheets
in front of every chapter in a document.
Printing or inserting a front cover and back cover
1 Display the Paper Handling tab.

2 To print or insert a front cover, check the “Use Front Cover” box
and select the drawer where the cover paper is loaded at the
“Source” drop down menu. Then select whether inserting a blank
cover or printed front cover at the “Print Style” drop down menu.
Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank front cover.

Print on 1 side of the page — Select this to print the first page of the document on a
front side of a cover.
Print both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages of the document on
both sides of a cover.
y When “Auto” is selected in the “Source” drop down menu, the paper is automatically
selected according to the printed document size.
y “Print both sides of page” is available only when 2-Sided printing is enabled at the
Finishing tab.
3 To print or insert a back cover, check the “Use Back Cover” box
and set the “Source” and “Print Style” options that you require.
y How to set the Source and Print Style options are the same as “Use Front Cover”
option.
4 To print or insert sheets between the pages, check the “Insert

Pages” box and click [Edit...].
y The Insert Pages dialog box appears.
y Up to 50 pages can be inserted.

y When Insert Pages printing is performed using the PS3 printer driver from an applica-
tion that can create the PS command directly, the overlay image will not be printed.
In that case, disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript Set-
tings dialog box.

5 Enter the page numbers the sheet will be inserted in each “Page”
field and select the “Print Style”, “Paper Source”, and “Paper Type”
options as you require. Then click [OK].Select the Use Tab Paper
check box and make settings when you want to insert the tab paper.

y A front cover and back cover are printed or inserted for output.
Interleaving Pages
This feature is useful when you want to insert paper of a different type, or from another source,
between every page of your print job. For example, you could use this option to insert blank,
colored sheets between overhead transparencies.
Interleaving pages can also be enabled for N-up printing by setting it in the Multiple Pages per
Sheet window.
P.267 “Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet”
Inserting sheets between every page of a print job
1 Display thePaper Handling tab.
2 To insert sheets between every page, check the “Interleave Pages”

box and select the drawer where the desired paper is loaded at the
“Source” drop down menu.
When “Auto” is selected in the “Source” drop down menu, the paper is automatically
selected according to the printed document size.

3 To print the previous page on interleaved sheets, check on “Dupli-

cate” box.
y This equipment prints every previous page on interleaved sheets which are inserted
after the page so that you can duplicate a document.

y Sheets are interleaved between every page.
Printing Booklets
Printing in normal booklet mode produces a document that, when folded, becomes a properly
paginated booklet or magazine-style publication. You can even create bound booklets that are
folded and stapled in the center.
For example, if you create a document on letter-size paper (8½ x 11 inches) and then print in
booklet mode, the yield is a 5½-x-8½-inch booklet. Each page has been scaled to fit on half a
sheet and reordered so that the booklet is properly paginated when folded.
To retain your original document size when printing booklets, select the booklet size same as
your original document size. Then, your 8½-inch document is printed on ledger size paper (11 x
17 inches) and reordered so that, when folded, the yield is an 8½-x-11-inch booklet. You can
select from the following page-size options when printing a tiled booklet:
y Letter Booklet on Ledger
y A4 Booklet on A3
y B5 Booklet on B4
When Booklet printing is performed using the PS3 printer driver from an application that can cre-
ate the PS command directly, the overlay image will not be printed. In that case, disable the
“Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript Settings dialog box.
Creating a booklet
1 Display the Finishing tab.
2 Check the “2-Sided Printing” box and select the “Booklet” icon.
3 Click [Details...].
y The Booklet Details dialog box appears.

4 Select the a booklet size at the “Output Document Layout” drop
down menu.
Letter-Half on Letter — Select this to print a 1/2 Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are
printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet.
LT on LD — Select this to print a Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
Ledger paper to fit on half a sheet (Letter).
1/2 LG on LG — Select this to print a 1/2 Legal size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 Statement on Statement — Select this to print a 1/2 Statement size booklet. Every
2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 Comp on Comp — Select this to print a 1/2 Computer size booklet. Every 2 pages
are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 13LG on 13LG — Select this to print a 1/2 13inchLG size booklet. Every 2 pages are
printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 8.5SQ on 8.5SQ — Select this to print a 1/2 8.5inchSQ size booklet. Every 2 pages
are printed on 8.5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet.
A5 on A4 — Select this to print a A5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on A4
B5 on B4 — Select this to print a B5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on B4
B6 on B5 — Select this to print a B6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on B5
1/2 Folio on Folio — Select this to print a 1/2 Folio size booklet. Every 2 pages are
printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet.
32K on 16K — Select this to print a 32K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on 16K
16K on 8K — Select this to print a 16K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on 8K

5 Select the page order for booklet in the “In page of the order”
option.
From Left to Right — Select this to print the pages from left to right.
From Right to Left — Select this to print the pages from right to left.
6 If you want to add a margin space between facing pages, enter a

width in the “Center” field, and if you want to add a margin on the
outside edge, enter a width in the “Outer” field.
y You can change the unit of the margin at the “Units” drop down menu.
y The center margin can be set from 0.000 inch to 0.500 inches in units of 0.01 inch
when the unit is inch, and from 0.000 mm to 12.700 mm in units of 0.10 mm when the
unit is mm.
The printed images will be reduced according to the margin setting.
7 If you want to double staple the center, check the “Staple Down the
Center” box.
“Staple Down the Center” is available only when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed
and configured on the Configuration tab.

y The print job is printed as a booklet.
If a Saddle Stitch Finisher is not installed, the output will not be folded. But you can cre-
ate a booklet by folding along the center by yourself.

Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet
The N-up feature allows you to condense and print several pages of a document on one sheet of
paper. This feature is very useful for browsing a large number of pages for appearance or page
order.
For example, to check the navigation path of a number of web pages or review the narrative of a
slide presentation, using N-up is not only convenient but conserves paper as well.
If you are using the Image Overlay feature in combination with N-up printing, the overlay prints
once per sheet, rather than once per page.
Printing multiple pages per sheet
1 Display the Finishing tab.
2 Select how many pages you want to print on a single sheet at the
“Number of pages per sheet” drop down menu.
2 pages — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet.
3 Select how the pages are arranged on one sheet in the “Direction of
print” option.
Left to Right — Select this to arrange pages horizontally from the left and printed top to
Right to Left — Select this to arranged pages horizontally from the right and printed top
to bottom on one sheet.
Left to Right by column — Select this to arrange pages vertically from the top and
printed left to right on one sheet.
Right to Left by column — Select this to arrange pages vertically from the top and
printed right to left on one sheet.
4 If you want to draw a line around each page, check the “Draw Bor-
ders Around Pages” box.

y Multiple pages are printed per sheet.

Using Watermarks
Watermarks overprint your document with useful information, such as “Confidential,” “Draft,” or
“Original.” You can choose from several predefined watermarks or you can create and save
your own custom watermarks.
Watermarks are text only. To add graphics or other document elements, use image overlays
instead.
Printing a watermark
1 Display the Effect tab and select the watermark to be printed at the
“Watermark” drop down menu.
You can create a new watermark if the watermark that you prefer is not listed in the drop
down menu.
2 If you want to print the watermark on only the first page, check on
the “Print on First Page Only” box.

y The print job is printed with the watermark.

Creating or editing a watermark
1 Click [Add] to create new watermark, or select a watermark that you

want to edit and click [Edit] to edit a watermark.
y The Watermark dialog box appears.
2 Enter the watermark text in the “Caption” field.

y You can enter up to 63 characters for the “Caption” field. However, if too many char-
acters are entered, the watermark may not be printed correctly.
3 Select a font for the watermark at the “Font Name” drop down
menu.
4 Select a font style for the watermark at the “Style” drop down
menu.
5 Enter the font size in the “Font Size” field.

y You can enter any integer between 6 to 300pt in units of 1pt.
6 To rotate the watermark, enter the degrees in the “Angle” field.

y You can enter from -90 degrees to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree in the “Angle” field.
y You can also set the angle using the scroll bar.
7 Select how the watermark text is printed from “Solid”, “Draw as

Outline”, and “Transparency”.
Solid — Select this to print solid type of watermark.
Draw as Outline — Select this to print an outline type of watermark.
Transparency — Select this for a transparent watermark. Set the transparent ratio from
0 to 100% in units of 1%. You can also set the transparent ratio using the scroll bar.
8 Click [OK] to save the watermark settings.

y The watermark is added or edited.

Deleting a watermark
You can delete the default watermarks. However, they cannot be restored by clicking the
[Restore Defaults] button.
1 Select a watermark that you want to delete at the “Watermark” drop

down menu.
2 Click [Delete].
Printing with an Overlay File

Using image overlays ensures that widely-used images are readily available and consistently
reproduced. Image overlays are independent documents that are merged into other documents
during printing and thereby increase the time required to print a job. To superimpose text on
your document, it may be faster to use watermarks.
To print with an overlay file, you should create an overlay file first.
P.254 “Creating An Overlay File”
y If you use Image Overlays in combination with the N-up feature, the image overlay is printed
once per sheet, not once per page.
y Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay image must
be created at the same size, and orientation.
y When printing with Overlay Image using the PS3 printer driver from an application that can
create the PS command directly, the overlay image will not be printed. In that case, disable
the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript Settings dialog box.
Printing an overlay image on a print job
1 Display the Effect tab and select the overlay image name to be used
in the “Overlay Image” drop down menu.

y The print job is printed with the overlay image.

Printing on a Tab Paper
This equipment supports tab printing, which can print in the tab extension of the tab paper.
y This equipment can print only on the Letter sized or A4 sized tab paper.
y If mis-printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously, toner may adhere to
the reverse side of a paper. To avoid this, it is recommended to print a tab paper as a sepa-
rated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning before printing the next tab
paper.
y When printing tab paper, the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray because
the roller failed to deliver the tab extension to the exit. In that case, remove the tab paper
before printing the next job.
Printing a document on tab paper
1 Create a Letter sized or A4 sized document and place the text or

object that should appear on the tab extension as described below.
Width of Tab Extension = Image Shift Margin
More than 0.2" or 5mm
Document Printed Image
Tab Text
Tab Text
Must exactly
fit the tab extension
When you create a document for tab printing, place the text or object that should appear
on the tab extension on the right side of the document. You must place the text in the
height exactly to fit to the tab extension. Also the right margin, a margin between the text
and right edge of the document, must have more than 0.2 inch or 5 mm space because
the equipment cannot print in the space.
2 Place tab paper on the Bypass Tray.

y When placing the tab paper on the Bypass Tray, place the tab paper so that the tab
side becomes outside.
Place the tab paper

so that the tab side
becomes outside.

3 When printing a document, display the Basic tab of the printer

driver properties, select document size in the “Original Paper Size”
drop down menu, and select either “Letter Tab” or “A4 Tab”
(according to the document size) in the “Print Paper Size” drop
down menu.
y The Primary Tab Dialog dialog box appears.
4 In the “Tab Manufacturer” drop down menu, select the product

name of the tab paper that you use, or select “Custom” when you
use other manufactured tab paper.
5 When you select “Custom” in the “Tab Manufacturer” option, enter

the width of tab extension in the “Tab Extension” field.
6 Enter the width to shift the printed image in the “Image Shift Width”
field.
y If you created a document as described in Step 1, enter the width of the tab extension
here.
This equipment cannot print in the 0.2 inch or 5 mm margin area on the right side on the
paper. Therefore, be sure to enter the image shift margin so that an image will be printed
within the printable area.
7 Click [OK].

y The print job is printed on the tab paper.

Printing from Macintosh
6.
This describes the instructions on how to print from client computer.
Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x..................276

How to Print from Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x................................................................276
Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x.........................................................277
Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.3.x to Mac OS X 10.4.x ....................................................................278
Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.x ....................................................................................................292
Printing from Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x.................................................304

How to Print from Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x ..............................................................................................304
Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x ...........................................................................................305
Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x.......................................................................................................306
6 Printing from Macintosh
Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x

Once you have installed the PPD file as described in "Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4
to Mac OS X 10.4.x" on page 141, you can print directly from most Mac OS applications.
When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are sent
from Macintosh computers are processed as invalid jobs according to the Department Code
Enforcement setting.

y If you print a PDF file with “Preview” application on Mac OS 10.2.x, the page order will be
incorrect. Please use Adobe Acrobat Reader.
How to Print from Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x

All printers are managed within the Printer Setup Utility and there is no need to switch the
printer.
Once you add a printer to the Printer List, all printers can be selected directly from Print Setup
dialog box.
Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers

In Mac OS applications, print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and the Print
dialog box.
Printing from Macintosh applications
1 Open a file and select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of the
application.
2 Select the name of the equipment at the “Format for” drop down
menu and specify the Page Setup settings for your print job.
y Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document.
P.277 “Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x”
3 Click [OK] to save the Page Setup settings.
4 Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
276 Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x

5 In the dialog box that appears, make sure the name of the equip-
ment is selected at the “Printer” menu and specify the Print set-
tings for your print job.
y Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document.
P.292 “Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.x”
Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x

The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Page Setup] command from
the [File] menu of the application.
In the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can specify the Page Attribute settings.
The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications.
Page Attributes
1) Format for
This select the printer to be used for printing.
Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x 277

2) Paper Size
y US Letter y A4
y Tabloid (Ledger) y A5
y US Legal y A3
y Statement y JB4
y Computer y JB5
y 13”LG y Folio
y 8.5”SQ y A6
y 8K
y 16K
The default paper size is “Letter” for the United States, and “A4” for the other countries.
3) Orientation
- Landscape (90 degree) — The document is printed in the landscape direction from left.
- Landscape (270 degree) — The document is printed in the landscape direction from
right.
4) Scale
This changes the size of the printed image on the page. Enter the zoom ratio to enlarge or
reduce an image. You can set any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom ratio.
Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.3.x to Mac OS X 10.4.x

The Print dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Print] command from the [File] menu
of the application.
The Print dialog boxes are different between Mac OS 10.2.x and Mac OS X 10.3.x to Mac OS
10.4.x. Please see the following section for the descriptions of the Print dialog boxes for Mac
OX 10.2.x.
P.292 “Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.x”
The Print dialog boxes vary across applications.

Copies & Pages
In the Copies & Pages menu, you can set general print options such as number of copies, and
sort printing.
1 2
3
1) Copies
2) Collated
Check this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...)
3) Pages
This sets the range of pages to be printed.
- All — Select this to print all pages.
- From/To — Select this to specify the pages to be printed. Enter the page range in the
From and To field.
Layout
In the Layout menu, you can set N-up printing (multiple pages per sheet).
3
4
1) Pages per Sheet

This sets the number of multiple pages printed on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit
the selected paper size automatically and are printed.
- 1 — Select this if do not wish to enable N-up printing.
- 2 — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet.


2) Layout Direction
This sets how pages are arranged on one sheet. This is available only when N-up printing
(printing multiple pages on one sheet) is set.
- Across Left to Right Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from left to right and
then top to bottom on one sheet.
- Across Right to Left Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from right to left and
- Down Before Across Left to Right — Pages arranged vertically from top to down and
then left to right on one sheet.
- Down Before Across Right to Left — Pages arranged vertically from top to down and
then right to left on one sheet.
3) Border
Select if a border line is to be drawn on each page. This is available only when the N-up
printing (printing multiple pages on one sheet) is set.
- None — Select this if no border line is to be drawn.
- Single hairline — Select this to draw single hairline for the border.
- Single thin line — Select this to draw single thin line for the border.
- Double hairline — Select this to draw double hairline for the border.
- Double thin line — Select this to draw double thin line for the border.
4) Two Sided Printing
This sets whether or not you want to print on both sides of the paper.
- Off — Select this when you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.
- Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of the paper. The
direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1
2
1
2
- Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of the paper. The
direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1
1
2
2
Output Options
In the Output Options menu, you can save a print job as a file.

This menu is displayed only for Mac OS X 10.3.x.
1 2
1) Save as File
Check this to save a print job as a file. When this is checked, select the file type at the “For-
mat” drop down menu.
2) Format
This sets the format of a file to be saved.
- PDF — Select this to save a print job as a PDF file.
- PostScript — Select this to save a print job as a PS file.

Scheduler
In the Scheduler menu, you can set when a print job will be sent to the equipment.
1) Print Document
This sets when a print job will be sent to the equipment.
- Now — Select this to send a print job now.
- At — Select this to specify the time to send a print job. When you select this, specify the
time to be send. The print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS until the specified
time has been reached or you resume the print job to be sent from the queue on Mac OS.
- On Hold — Select this to hold a print job in the queue on Mac OS. When you select this,
the print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS until you resume the print job to be sent
from the queue on Mac OS.
2) Priority
Select the priority of a print job.
Paper Handling
In the Paper Handling menu, you can set Reverse page order printing and Odd or Even num-
bered page printing.
The screens in the Paper Handling menu vary between Mac OS X 10.3.x and Mac OS 10.4.x.
Mac OS X 10.3.x
1) Reverse page order

Check this when you want to print a document beginning with the last page.
2) Print
Select whether all pages will be printed or only odd or even pages will be printed.

Mac OS X 10.4.x
1) Page Order
Select the page order for printing.
2) Print
Select whether all pages will be printed or only odd or even pages will be printed.
3) Destination Paper Size
Select the output paper size.
- Use documents paper size — Select this to print on the same sized paper as the docu-
ment size.
- Scale to fit paper size — Select this to perform enlarge/reduce printing. When this is
selected, select the output paper size in the drop down menu. If you do not want to
enlarge the document images when larger paper size is selected, check the “Scale down
only” box.
ColorSync
1) Color Conversion
Select the Color Conversion.
2) Quartz Filter
Select the presence of the Quartz Filter.

Cover Page
In the Cover Page menu, you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page. The ban-
ner page includes information about owner of the job, job name, application name, date and
time, and printer name.
1) Print Cover Page

This sets how a banner page is inserted.
- None — Select this not to print a banner page.
- Before Document — Select this to print a banner page before the document.
- After Document — Select this to print a banner page after the document.
2) Cover Page Type
Select the type of a banner page.
3) Billing Info
Enter the billing information to have it appear on the banner page. You can enter up to 24
characters.
Error Handling
In the Error Handling menu, you can set how to report a PostScript error.

1) PostScript Errors
This sets whether or not you want to print a PostScript error report.
- No special reporting — Select this if you do not want to print PostScript error informa-
tion.
- Print detailed report — Select this to print PostScript error information.
2) Tray Switching
This is not supported by this equipment.
Paper Feed
In the Paper Feed menu, you can set the paper source.
2
3
1) All pages from

Select this option button when you want to use the same paper source for all pages. When
this is selected, select the paper source or paper type to be used at the drop down menu.
2) First page from
Select this option button when you want to specify different paper sources for the first page
and remaining pages. When this selected, select the paper source or paper type to be used
for the first page at the drop down menu.
3) Remaining from
Select the paper source or paper type to be used for remaining pages in the drop down
menu. This can be selected only when you select the “First page from” option button.

Print Mode
In the Print Mode menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job. This menu
allows you to enable various job types such as Private Print and Proof Print.
1) Print Mode
- Normal — Select this to print a normal job.
- Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval
before printing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job, is saved in the
proof job queue on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until you
activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option allows you to check a job’s
output before printing the remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste.
- Private — Select this to print a private job. When this is selected, specify the 5-digit
password in the field next to the drop down menu. The print job is saved in the private
job queue on this equipment, and not printed until you activate printing from the Touch
Panel Display of this equipment. This option is useful when you want to print a confiden-
tial document secured using a password. The user has to enter the password to print the
private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel Display.
2) Department Code
Select whether a department code is required for printing. When this is enabled, specify the
5-digit department code in the field next to the drop down menu.
Enabling the department code depends on whether this equipment is managed with depart-
ment codes or not. Please ask your administrator for your department code.
Select whether you require printing blank pages.
y When more than 2 is selected at the “Page per Sheet” option in the Layout menu, the
blank pages will be printed.
y The pages that the header or footer exists will be printed even if the content are blank.

Select whether you require printing thin lines clearly.
Printer Features
In the Printer Features menu, you can set special printing features.

— Quality
In the Quality menu, you can specify various image quality features.
1
2
3
1) Halftone
This sets how halftone is printed.
2) Smoothing
Select whether printing the texts and graphics smoothly.
3) Toner Save
Select this to print in the toner save mode.

— Finishing
In the Finishing menu, you can set destination, hole punching and stapling.
2
3
1) Destination
This selects the destination tray.
- Printer’s Default — Select this to route the output to the default tray (that is set as the
default tray for raw job in the Printer setting page of TopAccess Administrator’s page).
arator.
arator.
y “Stapling and hole punching cannot be performed according to the type of the Finisher
installed and the destination setting.
y When "Auto" is select at the Destination option, the paper might be delivered to a tray
which cannot carry out stapling or hole punching according to the setting of the equip-
ment.
isher, Finisher (Type A), Finisher (Type B), or Saddle Stitch Finisher are installed.
enabled, select “Tray 2”.
isher is installed, and “Tray 1” can be selected when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is
installed.
y When the optional Job Separator is installed, you can select “Job Separator Upper” and
“Job Separator Lower” instead of “Inner Tray”.
2) Hole Punch
This sets whether or not a print job is hole punched.
- Off — Select this to print without hole punches.

- Long Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the left side for the
portrait document, or on the top for the landscape document.
- Short Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the top for the por-
trait document, or on the right for the landscape document.
- Long Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on the right
side for the portrait document, or on the bottom for the landscape document.
- Short Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on the bot-
tom for the portrait document, or on the left for the landscape document.
This option cannot be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed.
3) Stapling
This sets whether a print job is stapled.
- Off — Select this to print without stapling.
- Upper Left (Portrait)/Upper Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the upper left
for the portrait document, or in the upper right for the landscape document.

- Middle Left (Portrait)/Middle Top (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in the left
for the portrait document, or in the top for the landscape document.
- Lower Left (Portrait)/Upper Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the lower left
for the portrait document, or in the upper left for the landscape document.
- Upper Right (Portrait)/Lower Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the upper
right for the portrait document, or in the lower right for the landscape document.
- Middle Right (Portrait)/Middle Bottom (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in

the right for the portrait document, or in the bottom for the landscape document.
- Lower Right (Portrait)/Lower Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the lower
right for the portrait document, or in the lower left for the landscape document.
- Middle Top (Portrait)/Middle Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in the
top for the portrait document, or in the right for the landscape document.

- Middle Bottom (Portrait)/Middle Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in the
bottom for the portrait document, or in the left for the landscape document.
- Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in

the center for a booklet to be printed. Select this only when booklet printing is performed.
y This option cannot be selected if a finisher is not installed.

y “Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape)” can be selected only when the Sad-
dle Stitch Finisher is installed.
— Booklet
In the Booklet menu, you can set booklet printing.
2
3
4
1) Booklet Paper Size

Select a paper size for the booklet. Each two pages are printed on both side of a sheet
which is then folded. The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size that you specify.
2) Left to Right Page Layout
Check this to create a booklet can be read from left to right.
3) Booklet Center Margin
Select the width of space added to the center.

4) Booklet Outer Margin

Select the width of space added short edge side of a sheet.
Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.x

of the application.
The Print dialog box are different between Mac OS 10.2.x and Mac OS X 10.3.x to Mac OS
10.4.x. Please see the following section for the descriptions of the Print dialog box for Mac OX
10.3.x to 10.4.x.
P.278 “Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.3.x to Mac OS X 10.4.x”
The Print dialog boxes vary across applications.
Copies & Pages

In the Copies & Pages menu, the general print options such as number of copies, sort printing.
1 2
3
1) Copies
2) Collated
3) Pages
This sets the pages to be printed.
From and To field.

Layout
In the Layout menu, you can set N-up printing (multiple pages per sheets). The items in the Lay-
out menu vary depending on the Mac OS version.
1) Pages per Sheet

This sets the number of multiple pages printed on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit
the selected paper size automatically and are printed.
2) Layout Direction
This sets how pages are arranged on one sheet. This is available only when the N-up print-
ing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.
- Across Left to Right Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from left to right and
- Across Right to Left Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from right to left and
- Down Before Across Left to Right — Pages arranged vertically from top to down and
then left to right on one sheet.
- Down Before Across Right to Left — Pages arranged vertically from top to down and
then right to left on one sheet.
3) Border
Select if a border line is to be drawn on each page. This is available only when the N-up
printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.
- None — Select this if no border line is to be drawn.
- Single hairline — Select this to draw single hairline for the border.
- Single thin line — Select this to draw single thin line for the border.
- Double hairline — Select this to draw double hairline for the border.
- Double thin line — Select this to draw double thin line for the border.

Duplex
In the Duplex menu, you can set 2-Sided printing (printing on both sides of a sheet).
1 2
1) Print on Both Sides

Check this to print on both sides of the paper. When this is checked, select the binding direc-
tion at the “Binding” option.
2) Binding
This sets the type of binding for 2-sided printed pages.
- Off — Select this when you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.
- Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper. The direc-
tion to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1
2
1
2
- Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper. The direc-
Portrait Landscape
1
1
2
2
Output Options
In the Output Options menu, you can save a print job as a file.
1 2
1) Save as File
Check this to save a print job as a file. When this is checked, select the file type at the “For-
mat” drop down menu.

2) Format
This sets the format of a file to be saved.
- PDF — Select this to save a print job as a PDF file.
- PostScript — Select this to save a print job as a PS file.
Error Handling
In the Error Handling menu, you can set how to report a PostScript error.
1) PostScript Errors
This sets whether or not you want to print a PostScript error report.
- No special reporting — Select this if you do not want to print PostScript error informa-
tion.
- Print detailed report — Select this to print PostScript error information.
2) Tray Switching
This is not supported by this equipment.
Paper Feed
In the Paper Feed menu, you can set the paper source.
2
3
1) All pages from

Select the option button when you want to use same paper source for all pages. When this
is selected, select the paper source or paper type to be used at the drop down menu.

2) First page from

Select the option button when you want to specify different paper source for a first page and
remaining pages. When this selected, select the paper source or paper type to be used for a
first page at the drop down menu.
3) Remaining from
Select the paper source or paper type to be used for remaining pages in the drop down
menu. This can be selected only when you select the option button of the “First page from”
option.
Printer Features
In the Printer Features menu, you can set special printing features.
P.296 “Printing Modes”
P.297 “Quality”
P.298 “Private Document Password”
P.299 “Finishing”
P.302 “DC (Department Code)”
P.303 “Booklet”
— Printing Modes
In the Printing Modes menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job. This
menu allows you to enable various job types such as Private Print and Proof Print.
1
2
3
4
1) Print Mode
- Normal — Select this to print a normal job.
- Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval
before printing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job, is saved in the
proof job queue on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until you
activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option allows you to check a job’s
output before printing the remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste.

- Private - Password — Select this to print a private job. When this is selected, specify
the 5-digit password in the Private Document Password menu. The print job is saved in
the private job queue on this equipment, and not printed until you activate printing from
the Touch Panel Display of this equipment. This option is useful when you want to print a
confidential document secured using a password. The user has to enter the password to
print the private job when activating printing from the Touch Panel Display.
2) Department Code
Check this if a department code is required for printing. When this is enabled, specify the 5-
digit department code in the DC menu.
Enabling the department code depends on whether this equipment is managed with depart-
ment codes or not. Please ask your administrator for your department code.
Check this to print thin lines clearly.
y When more than 2 is selected at the “Page per Sheet” option in the Layout menu, the
blank pages will be printed.
y The pages that the header or footer exists will be printed even if the content are blank.
— Quality
1
2
3
1) Halftone
2) Smoothing

3) Toner Save
— Private Document Password

In the Private Document Password menu, you can specify the Document ID number for the pri-
vate job. It is recommended to specify the Private Document Password when you select to print
a private job. If you do not specify the Private Document Password, the private job uses default
Private Document Password “00000”.
2
3
4
5
1) Password - Digit 1
Select the first digit of the Document ID.
Select the second digit of the Document ID.
Select the third digit of the Document ID.
Select the forth digit of the Document ID.
Select the fifth digit of the Document ID.

— Finishing
In the Finishing menu, you can set destination, hole punching and stapling.
2
3
1) Destination
This selects the destination tray.
- Auto — Select this to route the output to the default tray (that is set as the default tray for
raw job in the Printer setting page of TopAccess Administrator’s page).
arator.
arator.
ment.
installed.
2) Hole Punch

3) Stapling



- Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape) — Select this to staple double in

the center for a booklet to be printed. Select this only when booklet printing is performed.
y This option cannot be selected if a finisher is not installed.

y “Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape)” can be selected only when the Sad-
dle Stitch Finisher is installed.
— DC (Department Code)
In the DC menu, you can specify your department code, if this equipment is enabled the depart-
ment codes. Before specifying the department code, you must check the Department Code
option in the Printing Modes menu. Then specify the department code in this menu.
2
3
4
5

How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no depart-
ment code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on the Department Code
Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator mode. When the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement is set to "ON", the invalid department code print job will be stored in the
invalid department code print job list without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement
is set to "Print", the invalid department code print job will be printed. When the Department
Code Enforcement is set to "Delete", the invalid department code print job will be deleted without
printing.
1) Department Code (DC) - Digit 1

Select the first digit of the department code.
Select the second digit of the department code.
Select the third digit of the department code.
Select the forth digit of the department code.
Select the fifth digit of the department code.
— Booklet
In the Booklet menu, you can set booklet printing.
2
3
4

Select a paper size for the booklet. Each two pages are printed on both side of a sheet
which is then folded. The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size that you specify.
2) Left to Right Page Layout
Check this to create a booklet can be read from left to right.
Select the width of space added to the center.
Select the width of space added short edge side of a sheet.

Printing from Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x

Once you have installed the PPD file as described in the section "Installing the Printer on Mac
OS 8.6/9.x" on page 168, you can print directly from most Mac OS applications.
When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are sent
from Macintosh computers are processed as invalid jobs according to the Department Code
How to Print from Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x

Using the LaserWriter 8 printer driver and the correct PostScript Printer Description file (PPD),
you can control the system’s various printing features by specifying job settings from print dialog
boxes.
Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computer

In Mac OS applications, print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and the Print
dialog box.
Printing from Macintosh applications
1 Open a file and select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of the
application.
2 Select the printer name at the “Format for” drop down menu and
specify the Page Setup settings for your print job.
y Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document.
P.305 “Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x”
3 Click [OK] to save the Page Setup settings.
4 Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
304 Printing from Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x

5 In the dialog box that appears, make sure the printer name is
selected at the “Printer” menu and specify the Print settings for
your print job.
y Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a document.
P.306 “Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x”
Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Page Setup] command from
the [File] menu of the application.
In the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can specify the Page Attribute settings and Custom Page
Size settings.
y The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications.

y The PostScript Options window contains the setting items that are generally provided by the
LaserWriter 8 printer driver. For details of the PostScript Options, please refer to the Balloon
Help on the Mac OS.
Page Attributes
In the Page Attributes menu, you can specify the paper size, orientation, and scale.
1) Format for
This selects the printer to be used for printing.
Printing from Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x 305

2) Paper
y Letter y A4
y Ledger y A5
y Legal y A3
y Statement y B4
y Computer y B5
y 13”LG y Folio
y 8.5”SQ y A6
y 8K
y 16K
The default paper size is “Letter” for the United States, and “A4” for the other countries.
3) Orientation
- Landscape — The document is printed in the landscape direction.
4) Scale
This changes the size of the printed image on the page. Enter the zoom ratio to enlarge or
reduce an image. You can set any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom ratio.
Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

of the application.
In the Print dialog boxes, you can display the General window, Background Printing window,
Color Matching window, Cover Page window, Font Settings window, Job Logging window, Lay-
out window, Save as File window, Finishing Options window, Printing Modes window, Watermark
Options windows, and Color Settings windows.
y The Print dialog boxes vary across applications.

y The Save as File window contains the setting items that are generally provided by the Laser-
Writer 8 printer driver. For details of the Save as File window, please refer to the Balloon
Help on the Mac OS.

General
In the General menu, you can set the general print options such as number of copies, sort print-
ing.
1 2
1) Copies
2) Collated
3) Pages
This sets the pages to be printed.
From and To field.
4) Paper Source
This selects the source for feeding paper. Please select a paper source that correlates with
the printing size.
- All pages from — Select this to use the same paper source for all pages. Select the
paper source or paper type at the pop-up menu on the right.
- First page from — Select this to use the different paper source for the first page from the
remaining pages. Select the paper source or paper type for the first page at the pop-up
menu on the right.
- Remaining from — Select the paper source or paper type for the remaining pages at the
pop-up menu on the right when you select the First page from option.

Background Printing
In the Background Printing menu, you can set how the print job is spooled.
1) Print in
This sets how the print job is spooled.
- Foreground (no spool file) — Select this to disable any operation on the computer until
printing is completed.
- Background — Select this to enable any operation on the computer during printing.
2) Print Time
This sets the schedule for printing.
- Urgent — Select this to print a job immediately.
- Normal — Select this to print a job normally.
- Print at — Select this to specify the time that the print job is sent to this equipment. Spec-
ify the time and date when this is selected.
- Put Document on Hold — Select this to hold the print job in the desktop print queue. To
send the print job held in the desktop print queue, double-click the printer icon on the
desktop and activate the print job.
Color Matching
This sets the color matching for printing.
1) Print Color
Select “Color/Grayscale” to print to this equipment. Other selections are not supported by
this equipment.

2) Intent
Do not specify this because “ColorSync Color Matching” and “PostScript Color Matching” at
the “Print Color” drop down menu are not supported.
3) Printer Profile
Do not specify this because “ColorSync Color Matching” and “PostScript Color Matching” at
the “Print Color” drop down menu are not supported.
Cover Page
In the Cover Page menu, you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page. The ban-
ner page includes information about owner of the job, job name, application name, date and
time, and printer name.
1) Print Cover Page

This sets how a banner page is inserted.
- None — Select this not to print a banner page.
- Before Document — Select this to print a banner page before the document. When this
is selected, select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source option.
- After Document — Select this to print a banner page after the document. When this is
selected, select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source option.
2) Cover Page Paper Source
Select the paper source when you set to print a banner page.

Font Settings
In the Font Settings menu, you can set how the fonts are printed.
2
3
4
1) Annotate Font Keys

Check this to annotate font keys for printing.
2) Preferred Format
This sets the whether Type 1 fonts or TrueType fonts are used for printing.
- Type 1 — Select this to print fonts using Type 1 fonts.
- TrueType — Select this to print fonts using TrueType fonts.
3) Always Download needed fonts
Check this to always download fonts for printing.
4) Never generate Type 42 format
Check this not to generate the Type 42 format.
Job Logging
In the Job Logging menu, you can set the error handling and generate job logs.
1 3
1) If there is PostScript error

This sets whether reporting the error or not.
- No special reporting — Select this not to report an error.
- Summarize on screen — Select this to report on the screen when a PostScript error
occurs.
- Print detailed report — Select this to print a detailed report when a PostScript error
occurs.

2) Job Documentation
This sets whether job logs or job copies are generated or not.
- Generate Job Copy — Check this to generate a job copy. If enabled, a job copy is gen-
erated in the folder which is specified at the “Job Documentation Folder”.
- Generate Job Log — Check this to generate a job log. If enabled, a job log is generated
in the folder which is specified at the “Job Documentation Folder”.
3) Job Documentation Folder
The folder where job copies and job logs are stored is displayed. To change the folder, click
[Change] and select a different folder.
Layout
In the Layout menu, you can set N-up printing and 2-Sided printing.
4
5
1) Pages per sheet

This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit the
selected paper size automatically.
- 4 — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to bot-
tom on one sheet.
tom on one sheet.
tom on one sheet.
- 16 — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged horizontally and printed top to
- 4 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged vertically
from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.
- 16 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged verti-
cally from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.
2) Layout direction
This sets pages to be printed from left to right or right to left. It is available only when the N-
up printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.

3) Border
Select whether a border line is to be drawn on each page. It is available only when the N-up
printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.
- None — Select this if no border line to be drawn.
- Single hairline — Select this to draw a single hairline for the border.
- Single thin line — Select this to draw a single thin line for the border.
- Double hairline — Select this to draw a double hairline for the border.
- Double thin line — Select this to draw a double thin line for the border.
4) Print on Both Sides
Check this to print on both sides of the paper. When checked, select the binding direction at
the “Binding” option.
5) Binding
This sets the type of binding for 2-sided-printed pages.
- Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper. The direc-
Portrait Landscape
1
2
1
2
- Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper. The direc-
Portrait Landscape
1
1
2
2
Finishing Options
In the Finishing Options menu, you can set the destination, hole punching and stapling features.
1
2
3
1) Destination
This selects the output destination tray.
- Inner Tray — Select this when no finisher is installed.
arator.

arator.
ment.
installed.
2) Hole Punch

3) Stapling

This option cannot be selected if a finisher is not installed.

Printing Modes
In the Printing Mode menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job. This menu
allows you to enable various system features such as Private Print and Proof Print.
1
2
3
4
1) Print Job
- Normal — Select this to print a job normally.
- Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multi-copy job then await your approval
before printing the remaining copies. The print job sent as a proof job is saved in the
proof job list on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until you acti-
vate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment. This option allows you to
check the output before printing additional copies and thereby reduce paper waste.
- Private - Password — Select this to print a private job. When this is selected, enter 5-
digit Password in the field. The print job is saved in the private job queue on this equip-
ment, and not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this
equipment. This option is useful when you want to print a confidential document secured
using a password. The user has to enter the password to print the private job when acti-
vating printing from the Touch Panel Display. It is recommended to specify the password
when you select to print a private job. If you do not specify the password, the private job
uses default password “00000”.
2) Department Code
Enter a user’s department code when this equipment is managed with department codes.
Please ask your administrator for your department code.
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no
ment Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator mode. When
the Department Code Enforcement is set to “ON”, the invalid department code print job will
be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing. When the Department
Code Enforcement is set to “Print”, the invalid department code print job will be printed.
When the Department Code Enforcement is set to “Delete”, the invalid department code print
job will be deleted without printing.
3) Toner Save`
When the toner save mode is enabled, printing may become light.

Booklet Mode Options

In the Booklet Mode Options menu, you can set booklet printing.
1
2
3
4

Select a paper size to print a booklet. Each two pages are printed on both side of a sheet
before folding. The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size you specify here.
When booklet is used with cover page, it is recommended to use AppleTalk printing rather
than LPR printing.
2) Booklet Page Layout

Select the direction to be printed.
- Right to Left — Select this to create a booklet can be read from right to left.
- Left to Right — Select this to create a booklet can be read from left to right.
Select the width of space added to the center. If there is not a preferred width in the list,
enter the width by points. You can enter from 0 point to 300 points in units of 1 point.
Select the width of space added in the short-edge side on a sheet. If there is not a preferred
width in the list, enter the width by points. You can enter from 0 point to 18 points in units of
1 point.

Watermark Options
In the Watermark Options (A) and Watermark Options (B) menu, you can enable watermark
printing.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1) Watermarking
This sets the printing of a watermark.
2) Watermark Text
Select the watermark text to be printed. If there is not a preferred watermark in the list, enter
the watermark text in the field displayed.
3) Watermark Text Size
Select the font size of watermark text. If there is not a preferred font size in the list, enter the
font size by points. You can enter from 4 points to 400 points in units of 1 point.
4) Watermark Text Angle
Select the degree of angle for rotating the watermark text. If there is not a preferred angle in
the list, enter the degrees from -90 to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree.
5) Watermark Gray Level
Select the gray level of the watermark text color. If there is not preferred gray level in the list,
enter the percentage from 1% to 100% in units of 1%.
6) Watermark Font
Select the font family for the watermark text.
7) Watermark Position
Select the position of the watermark text. If there is not preferred position in the list, enter the
X position and Y position manually.

8) Watermark Outline
Select the outline points or “Filled” to print a watermark as a solid text. If there is not a pre-
ferred point listed, enter from 0.1 points to 20 points in units of 0.1 points.
Quality
1
2
3
1) Halftone
2) Smoothing
3) Toner Save

Printing from UNIX
7.
This describes the instructions on how to print from UNIX workstation.
Printing from an Application................................................................................322

Printing Using LP Command...........................................................................................................322
Generic “lp” and “lptap” Options......................................................................................................322
General Options ..............................................................................................................................323
PCL5e Specific Options ..................................................................................................................333
7 Printing from UNIX
Printing from an Application

This section describes how to print from a UNIX workstation.
y When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are
sent from UNIX workstations are processed as invalid jobs according to the Department
Code Enforcement setting.
y Before attempting to print from a UNIX workstation, make sure all the UNIX Filters are
installed in your workstation.
P.177 “Installing Client Software for UNIX”

y This equipment acts only as a filter and not as a complete driver. The size and order of the
printed pages cannot be modified.
y The UNIX filters do not support the following engine-supplied features:
- Enlarge/Reduce printing
- Rotate Sort
- N-up printing
- Watermarks
- Cover Sheets
- Sheet Insertion
- Scheduled Print
- Print to Overlay File
- Store to e-Filing
- Use Overlay Image
y Linux uses the lptap command to send a file to this equipment.
Since lp is not supported in all versions of Linux, the lptap command should be used instead.
y AIX supports printing using the qdaemon. This can be invoked by the user with the com-
mands lp, lpr or qprt. In order to use the filter, either lp or qprt should be used.
Printing Using LP Command

Use the lp command (lptap in Linux) to send a file to this equipment for printing. This command
specifies various printer-specific options using the -o option parameter on the command line.
The lp command also sets other print options using various other parameters. Use the man
estbw.1 command to display the online document that describes the various options and param-
eters that can be set to configure printed output.
All the options are sent to this equipment at the start of a print job so, if the print file contains its
own commands, they may override the lp options.
Generic “lp” and “lptap” Options
Copies
The number of copies of a print job is specified using the “-n value” parameter with the “lp” com-
mand. The default value is determined by the “lp” command and it is always 1. The copies are
always collated.
322 Printing from an Application

Title
The title that is printed on the banner page can be specified using the “-t title” parameter with the
“lp” command. The default value is determined by the “lp” command and it is often the name of
the print file. If multiple files are printed using the same “lp” command the default title is set to the
name of the first file by the “lp” command.
General Options
The following options apply to all print files.
Option commands are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown.
Print Language
The “net_estbw” program needs to know what printer language is used in each of the files that it
is printing so that it can issue the correct commands to select various options. The following
options are valid for the print languages.
Alternate
Option Value Description
Value
auto Each file to be printed is examined to see if it starts with
the “%!” sequence. If it does, then it is assumed that it is
a PostScript file, otherwise it assumes that it is a plain
text or a PCL6 file.
pcl The print file is always treated as a plain text or a PCL6

file.
postscript ps The file is always treated as a PostScript file.
raw The file is treated as a fully formatted file that already

contains all the necessary commands. The file is sent to
the printer without any modifications. In this mode no
other options are valid and a banner page is not printed.
All PCL5e jobs automatically send the “<esc>&k2G” command to convert the line-feed character
into a carriage-return - line-feed sequence. If the PCL5e job contains some of its own escape
sequences it may override this setting.
The default print language is “auto”.
Example: The command to specify that a file is PostScript is “lp -o ps filename”.
Stapling
The staple position can be specified using the following option.
Alternate
Value
staple=0 Stapling is turned off.
staple=1 Staple in the top left corner of a portrait page and the
upper right corner of a landscape page.
Printing from an Application 323

Alternate
Value
staple=2 Put two staples on the left side of a portrait page or the
top side of a landscape page printed on long-edge-feed
paper. This command has no affect when the paper is
fed from the short-edge side.
staple=3 Staple in the bottom left corner of a portrait page and

the upper left corner of a landscape page.
staple=4 Staple in the top right corner of a portrait page and the
bottom right corner of a landscape page.
staple=5 Put 2 staples on the right side of a portrait page or the

bottom side of a landscape page printed on long-edge-
feed paper. This command has no affect when the
paper is fed from the short-edge side.
staple=6 Staple in the bottom right corner of a portrait page and

the lower left corner of a landscape page.
staple=7 Put 2 staples on the top side of a portrait page or the

right side of a landscape page printed on short-edge-
feed large format (A3/Ledger) paper. This command
has no affect when the paper is fed from the long-edge
side or small paper size.
staple=8 Put 2 staples on the bottom side of a portrait page or

the left side of a landscape page printed on short-edge-
feed large format (A3/Ledger) paper. This command
has no affect when the paper is fed from the long-edge
side or small paper size.
staple=9 Put 2 staples in the middle of a landscape page and fold

the paper in half vertically along the staple line (saddle
stitching). This command works in conjunction with
booklet printing. This command has no affect when the
paper is fed from the long-edge side.
If this option is not specified, the printer’s default value will be used.
Example: The command to staple in the upper left corner of a long edge feed portrait page is “lp
-o staple=1 filename”.
The value for the stapling position depends on the paper size, the paper feed direction, and the
print direction. This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users should refer to the
copier manual for a list of compatible paper sizes. In particular, A5, A6 and statement paper
sizes will not work with this function.
Output Bin
The output bin can be specified using the following options.
Alternate
Value
inner Select the inner tray.
bin1 Select the upper output tray of the finisher.
bin2 Select the lower output tray of the finisher.
If the finisher option is not installed on the equipment, the default output tray will be used (inner).
If the finisher option is installed on the equipment, the default output tray will be used (bin2).

Example: The command to specify output bin 1 is “lp -o bin1 filename”.
Hole Punching
When the hole punch option is installed it can be activated using the following option.
Alternate
Value
punch=0 nopunch Hole punching is turned off.
punch=1 Hole punch long edge without rotation.
punch=2 Hole punch short edge without rotation.
punch=3 Hole punch long edge with 180 degree rotation.
punch=4 Hole punch short edge with 180 degree rotation.
If this option is not specified, the default value of “nopunch” will be used.
This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users should refer to the copier manual
for a list of compatible paper sizes. In particular, A5, A6 and statement paper sizes will not work
with this function.
Example: The command to hole punch the long edge feed portrait page is
“lp -o punch=1 filename”.
Media Type
The paper source can also be selected using the media type using the following option.
Alternate
Value
mtype=Plain The paper source that contains Plain paper is
requested.
mtype= The paper source that contains transparency slides is

Transparency requested.
mtype=Thick1 The paper source that contains Thick1 paper is

requested.
mtype=Thick2 The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is

requested.
mtype=Thick3 The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is

requested.
In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always turned on so the paper size has priority over
the media type and the paper source.
In PCL5e the paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source.
If this option is not specified, the default value will be used.
Example: The command to specify Thick1 media type is “lp -o mtype=Thick1 filename”.

Paper Source
The paper source can be selected using the following options.
Alternate
Value
auto-source Select auto paper tray selection.
manual Select Bypass Tray.
drawer1 upper Select the 1st drawer.

cas1
drawer2 lower Select the 2nd drawer.

cas2
drawer3 pedupper Select the 3rd drawer.

cas3
drawer4 pedlower Select the 4th drawer.

cas4
LCF lcf Select the LCF. LCF is not available for some countries
or regions.
In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always turned on so the paper size has priority over
the paper source. In PCL5e the paper size always has priority over the paper source.
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will be
used.
Example: The command to specify the LCF paper source is “lp - o lcf filename”.
Duplexing
The current duplex mode can be specified using the following options.
Alternate
Value
simplex Turn duplexing off.
duplex lduplex Turn duplexing on with long edge binding.

duplex_long
duplex=long
hduplex
sduplex duplex_short Turn duplexing on with short edge binding.

duplex=short
vduplex
If this option is not specified, the default value “simplex” will be used.
It is not necessary to specify duplexing for Booklet Mode (sduplex). Setting duplexing separately
can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing.
Example: The command to specify long edge duplexing is “lp -o duplex filename”.

Paper Size
The current paper size can be specified using the following options.
Alternate
Value
letter lt Select letter size paper.
LT
A4 a4 Select A4 size paper.
legal lg Select legal size paper.

LG
statement st Select statement size paper.

ST
ledger ld Select ledger size paper.

LD
ledgerwode ldwide Select ledger wide size paper.

LDWIDE
folio folio-japan Select folio size paper.
B4 b4 Select JIS B4 size paper.

b4-jis
B4-JIS
B5 b5 Select JIS B5 size paper.

b5-jis
B5-JIS
computer co Select computer size paper.

CO
legal13 lg13 Select LG13inch size paper.

LG13
sq85 letter-square Select SQ8.5inch size paper.
8K 8k Select 8K size paper.
16K 16k Select 16K size paper.
Example: The command to specify the A4 paper size is “lp -o a4 filename”.
Printing Modes
The printing mode can be selected using the following options.
Alternate
Value
normal Process as a normal print job.
proof Process as a proof print job.

Alternate
Value
private=din Process as a private print job. The din is up to 63-digit
(between 1 to 63) password.
A private printing job requires the user to enter a maximum number of 63 character long string.
Character lengths longer than 63 will be clipped to 63.
The following characters are invalid, but no type checking is carried out.
“& ‘ ( ) ; < > ˆ ` | ~
Department Code
The department access code can be set using the following option.
Alternate
Value
dept=code Set the department access code. The code is a 5-digit
numeric value.
How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no depart-
ment code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on the Department Code
Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator mode. When the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement is set to "ON", the invalid department code print job will be stored in the
invalid department code print job list without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement
is set to "Print", the invalid department code print job will be printed. When the Department
Code Enforcement is set to "Delete", the invalid department code print job will be deleted without
printing.
Smoothing
The smoothing mode can be set using the following option.
Alternate
Value
smoothing=on ON Set the smoothing mode.
smoothing=off OFF Cancel the smoothing mode.
Example: The command to set the smoothing mode is “lp -o smoothing=on filename”.
Distinguish Thin Lines

The thin line limit mode can be set using the following option.
Alternate
Value
thinlinelimit=on ON Set the thin line limit mode.
thinlinelimit=off OFF Cancel the thin line limit mode.
Example: The command to set the thin line limit mode is

“lp -o thinlinelimit=on filename”.

Do not Print Blank Pages
The Blank page mode can be selected using the following option.
Alternate
Value
blankpage=0 Set the blank page mode (disable Do not Print Blank
Pages).
blankpage=1 Cancel the blank page mode (enable Do not Print Blank
Pages).
Toner Save
The toner save mode can be set using the following option.
Alternate
Value
tonersave=on ON Set the toner save mode.
tonersave=off OFF Cancel the toner save mode.
Example: The command to set the toner save mode is “lp -o tonersave=on filename”.
Booklet Modes
The booklet mode can be selected using the following options.
The booklet printing cannot be performed when no Automatic Duplexing Unit is installed.
Alternate
Value
booklet=letter lt Select letter size paper for booklet printing mode.
LT
booklet=A4 a4 Select A4 size paper for booklet printing mode.
booklet=legal lg Select legal size paper for booklet printing mode.

LG
booklet= st Select statement size paper for booklet printing mode.

statement ST
booklet=ledger ld Select ledger size paper for booklet printing mode.

LD
booklet=folio folio-japan Select folio size paper for booklet printing mode.
booklet=B4 b4 Select JIS B4 size paper for booklet printing mode.

B4-JIS
b4-jis

Alternate
Value
booklet=B5 b5 Select JIS B5 size paper for booklet printing mode.
B5-JIS
b5-jis
booklet= co Select computer size paper for booklet printing mode.

computer CO
booklet=legal13 lg13 Select legal-13 size paper for booklet printing mode.
LG13
booklet=SQ85 sq85 Select 8.5 inch square size paper for booklet printing
letter-square mode.
booklet=8K 8k Select 8K size paper for booklet printing mode.
booklet=16K 16k Select 16K size paper for booklet printing mode.
In a job, if this value is LT, and in PDL too the data is for LT paper size, this will result in a scaled
booklet on Letter paper. In a job, if this value is A3, and in PDL the data is for A4 paper size, this
will result in a tiled booklet on A3 paper.
When the Booklet Mode options is selected, the paper size is automatically set to the same size
as for Booklet Mode. This function is only available for A3, A4, B4, Letter and Ledger paper
sizes.
If booklet mode is selected, then duplexing is also selected automatically (sduplex). Setting
duplexing separately can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing.
Example: The command to select the letter size paper for booklet printing mode is
“lp –o booklet=letter filename”.
Page Layout
The booklet mode page layout can be selected using the following options.
Alternate
Value
left2right=off OFF Select right to left page layout for booklet printing mode.
This value decides the layout of the pages in the book-
let.
If this value is OFF then the layout of pages is Right to
Left as shown in the figure below.

Alternate
Value
left2right=on ON Select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode.
This is the default setting.
If the value is ON then the layout of the pages is from
Left to Right as shown in the figure below.
If left2right=off then long edge binding is selected, otherwise if left2right=on then short edge
binding is used.
Example: The command to select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode is
“lp -o left2right=on filename”.
Center Margin
The booklet mode center margin can be selected using the following options.
Alternate
Value
centermargin Select the center margin value for booklet printing
=value mode.
This value specifies in pixels the Center Margin or the
“Gutter”. This is in addition to the center margin already
specified by the application. The valid range for value is
0 - 300. Default is 0.
Example: The command to select the center margin value for booklet printing mode is
“lp -o centremargin=value filename”.
Outer Margin
The booklet mode outer margin can be selected using the following options.
Alternate
Value
outermargin Select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode.
=value This value specifies in pixels the Outer Margin or the
“Creep” per page, which should take place while print-
ing a booklet. The valid range for value is 0 - . Default is
0.
Example: The command to select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode is
“lp -o outermargin=value filename”.

Collate
The collate option can be selected using the following options.
Alternate
Value
collate=off OFF Cancel the collate printing mode.
collate=on ON Set the collate printing mode.
Example: The command to select collate off is “lp -o collate=off filename”.
Orientation
The following orientation options are available.
Alternate
Value
portrait Print the document in portrait orientation.
landscape Print the document in landscape orientation.
used.
Example: The command to specify landscape orientation is “lp -o landscape filename”.
Font Pitch
If the pitch is specified the net_estbw program will always select the Courier font; otherwise the
default font is used. The following options are used to select the font pitch.
Alternate
Value
c pitch=16.67 Set the character pitch to 16.67 characters per inch.
10 pitch=10 Set the character pitch to 10 characters per inch.
12 pitch=12 Set the character pitch to 12 characters per inch.
pitch=value Set the character pitch to value characters per inch.
In all the cases shown above the Courier font will also be selected. When the pitch is changed
the font size will automatically be scaled to the appropriate size.
If this option is not specified, the default pitch and font will be used.
Example: The command to specify 8 characters per inch is “lp -o pitch=8 filename”.
Page Length
The number of lines to print on a page can be specified with the following option.
Alternate
Value
pl=value Set the lines per page to value.

As this equipment is a page printer we cannot change the physical length of a piece of paper so
the actual effect of this command is to change the value for lines per inch so that the requested
number of lines is printed on the page. The actual page length may differ from this value if the
top margin or the text length option is used.
If this option is not specified the PJL command will not be sent so the printer’s default value will
be used. The minimum page length allowable is 5. If value is less than 5 page length is set to 5.
The command to specify 66 lines per page is “lp -o pl=66 filename”.
Halftone
The halftone can be selected using the following options.
Alternate
Value
halftone=AUTO Set the proper halftone depending on the contents in
the document automatically.
halftone=DETAIL Set the halftone in detail.
halftone= Set the halftone smoothly.

SMOOTH
Example: The command to set the auto halftone for the print job is
“lp -o halftone=AUTO filename”
PCL5e Specific Options

Some of the options only apply to plain text or PCL5e files.
Text Wrapping
The following options control text wrapping when it reaches the right margin.
Alternate
Value
wrap Enable automatic text wrapping.
nowrap Disable automatic text wrapping.
used.
Example: The command to specify wrapping is “lp -o wrap filename”.
Left Margin
The left margin position can be specified with the following option.
Alternate
Value
lm=value Set the left margin to value columns.
If the left margin is set to the right of the right margin it will be ignored.
used.
Example: The command to set the left margin to five columns is “lp -o lm=5 filename”.

Right Margin
The right margin position can be specified with the following option.
Alternate
Value
rm=value Set the right margin to value columns.
If the right margin is set to the left of the left margin or if it is set to a position wider than the logi-
cal page it will be ignored. The right margin is specified in columns from the left margin. A nega-
tive value will be ignored.
used.
Example: The command to set the right margin to fifty columns is
“lp -o rm=50 filename”.
Top Margin
The top margin position can be specified with the following option.
Alternate
Value
tm=value Set the top margin to value lines.
If the top margin is set too high or too low part of the text may not appear due to the printer’s
unprintable region. The top margin will be ignored if it is set to a value greater than the printer’s
logical page length. Setting this value may affect the number of lines specified using the page
length option.
used.
Example: The command to set the top margin to ten lines is “lp -o tm=10 filename”.
Text Length
The text length can be specified using the following options.
Alternate
Value
tl=value Set the length to value lines.
If the text length is set too high, the part of the text may not appear due to the printer’s unprint-
able area. The text length will be ignored if it is set to a value greater than the printer’s logical
page length minus the top margin. The text length is specified in rows from the top margin. Set-
ting this value may affect the number of lines specified using the page length option.
used.
Example: The command to set the text length to 40 lines is “lp -o tl=40 filename”.
Banner Page
A banner page is automatically generated for each file in each job. The banner page contains
the following items. The banner page is always sent as a PCL5e job.
y The name of the user that submitted the print job.
y The job ID number and from which workstation it was submitted.

y The title of the job. This title can be specified using the “-t” option. The same title is used for
every file within a job. The default title is controlled by the “lp” command.
y The name of the printer or its IP address.
y The date and time when the job was printed according to the print server.
Only one copy of the banner page is printed for each file, even if a number of copies of the job
are requested. The banner page is sent to the equipment as a separate sub-job so that it is
never stapled to the document.
The banner page is printed with the following settings.
y Copies = 1.
y Stapling off.
y Orientation = portrait.
y Duplex off.
y Paper size as requested by the “-o” parameter or the printer’s default value.
y The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different values than
the job’s paper source and media type.
y Auto paper source selection or the requested banner page source or media type.
y Output bin as requested by the “-o” parameter or the printer default value.
y 6 lines per inch
y Auto-wrap on.
y Automatic carriage-return when a line-feed is sent.
y The banner page is designed to fit the paper .

y The default is that the banner page is printed before the job so that it is in the correct stack-
ing order.
y When the language is set to “raw” the banner is always disabled.
y The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different values than
the job’s paper source and media type. If a banner paper source is not specified then the
auto source command is sent. If a banner media type is not specified then no banner media
type command is sent, so the printer’s default value will be used.
y If the file being printed specifies the paper destination or the paper size internally the banner
page may print to the wrong output or on an incorrect paper size.
— Banner Options
The banner page can be printed using the following options.
Alternate
Value
banner=last Print the banner page after the job so that it will be
physically on top of the job in the output tray.
banner=first banner Print the banner page before the job so that it will be
physically under the job in the output tray.
nobanner nb Do not print a banner. The ability to specify the “noban-

ner” option can be disabled by the system administrator
to force all jobs to print with a banner.
The default value for this option is that the banner page prints first.

— Banner Paper Source

The banner paper source can be specified using the following option.
Alternate
Value
bauto-source Select the auto paper tray selection.
bdrawer1 bupper Select the 1st drawer.

bcas1
bdrawer2 blower Select the 2nd drawer.

bcas2
bdrawer3 bpedupper Select the 3rd drawer.

bcas3
bdrawer4 bpedlower Select the 4th drawer.

bcas4
blcf BLCF Select the LCF. LCF is not available for some countries
or regions.
If the banner paper source is not specified the PCL5e auto paper source command “<esc>&l7H”
will be sent. The banner page source cannot be set to manual feed. The paper size always has
priority over the paper source.
Example: The command to specify that the banner page paper source is the LCF is
“lp -o blcf filename”.
— Banner Media Type

The banner page paper source can also be selected using the media type using the following
option.
Alternate
Value
bmtype=Plain1 The paper source that contains Plain1 paper is
requested.
bmtype= The paper source that contains transparency slides is

Transparency requested.
bmtype=Thick1 The paper source that contains Thick1 paper is

requested.
bmtype=Thick2 The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is

requested.
bmtype=Thick3 The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is

requested.
The paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source.
used to print the banner page.
The command to specify that the banner page should print on a colored media type is
“lp -o bmtype=Plain1 filename”.

Other Printing Methods
8.
This equipment also supports following printing methods:
FTP Printing...........................................................................................................338
Email Printing........................................................................................................340
8 Other Printing Methods
FTP Printing
FTP printing is available when the FTP print service is enabled on this equipment.
You can print a document by sending the print file to this equipment using the FTP. This equip-
ment can accept following files for printing:
y PCL file
y PS file
y Text file
When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are sent by
FTP printing are processed as invalid jobs according to the Department Code Enforcement set-
ting.
y In Windows, you can create the PCL file and PS file using the printer driver. To create the
PCL file or PS file, change the printer port of the printer driver to “FILE:” port and print a doc-
ument using the printer driver. For more information about printing to a file, refer to the Win-
dows documentation.
y In Macintosh, you can create the PS file using the printer driver. To create the PS file, select
“File” at the “Destination” drop down menu in the Print dialog box to print. For more informa-
tion about printing to a file, refer to the Macintosh documentation.
Printing a file using the FTP command
The procedure below describes the example of printing using the FTP command with the MS-
DOS Prompt.
1 Launch the MS-DOS Prompt.
2 Change the current directory to where the print file is located.
3 Type following command and press the [Enter] key:

ftp <IP Address>
y In the <IP Address> section, enter the IP address of this equipment.
4 If it prompts you to enter the user name, enter the FTP Print User
Name and press the [Enter] key.
It prompts you to enter the user name if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an
administrator. Ask your administrator for the FTP Print User Name.
5 If it prompts you to enter the password, enter the FTP Print Pass-
word and press the [Enter] key.
y It prompts you to enter the password if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an
administrator. Ask your administrator for the FTP Print Password.
y If the FTP Print User Name has been assigned but the FTP Print Password blank, do
not enter when it prompts you to enter the password and press the [Enter] key.
338 FTP Printing

6 Type the following command and press the [Enter] key:
put <file name>
For example of the print file name is “sample.ps”:
put sample.ps
7 The file is sent to this equipment and spooled in the queue.
FTP Printing 339

8 Other Printing Methods
Email Printing
Email printing is available when enabled on this equipment.
You can print a document by sending the print file, as an email attachment, to this equipment
using the mail client software. This equipment can accept only TIFF-S, TIFF-F and TIFF-J files
for printing:
y When the User Management Setting is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are
sent by Email printing are processed as invalid jobs according to the Department Code
y The Email print job is printed according to the RX Print settings, Discard Printing and RX
Reduction Printing, that can be set from the [RX PRINT] button in the [FAX] menu on the
Control Panel.
When Discard Printing is ON, the part of the print image that exceeds the paper printing area
is discarded if the print image is up to 10mm larger than the printing area. If the print image
is 10mm or more larger than the printing area, the print image is printed on the largest paper.
When Discard Printing is OFF, the print image is printed on the largest paper if its length
exceeds the paper printing area.
When RX Reduction Printing is ON, it will be vertically reduced to fit on the paper if the print
image is longer than the paper. When the print image cannot fit in the paper even if the print
image is reduced, the print image is printed on the largest paper.
When RX Reduction Printing is OFF, the print image is printed on the largest paper if its
length exceeds the paper printing area.
Printing a file using the email client
The procedure below gives as example of printing using the Microsoft Outlook Express.
When you send an email message to this equipment to print a file, send the message in plain
text format. If you send an email message in the HTML format, this equipment prints the HTML
source code of the message.
1 Open your email application and create new mail message.
2 Enter the email address of the equipment in the To: line.
3 Enter text in the Subject line or leave the Subject line blank.
4 Enter text in the body field.
5 Attach the file you want to print.
6 Send the email.
The header and body of the email will be printed only when the “Print Header” and “Print
Message Body” for the Email print service is enabled on this equipment.
340 Email Printing

Monitoring Print Jobs
9.
This section describes how to monitor print jobs using TopAccessDocMon.
Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon ................................................342

Features and Functions ..................................................................................................................342
How to Use TopAccessDocMon......................................................................................................342
Monitoring the Printer......................................................................................................................348
9 Monitoring Print Jobs
Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

TopAccessDocMon is a job monitoring tool that can remotely display and manage print jobs on
the queues of the equipment and other compatible TOSHIBA printer controllers from the client
computer.
TopAccessDocMon supports device and job monitoring the following TOSHIBA controllers:
y e-STUDIO3510c Series
y e-STUDIO451c Series
y e-STUDIO850 Series
y GL-1020
y GL-1010
y SC-2
TopAccessDocMon also can monitor the device status of the devices that support MIB-II, Host
Resource MIB, and Printer MIB.
y To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon, the equipment and your computer must
be connected in the TCP/IP or IPX/SPX network.
y To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon, the SNMP Network Service must be
enabled using TopAccess. Information about setting up the SNMP Network Service from the
TopAccess is provided in the TopAccess Guide.
y TopAccessDocMon is only available for Windows. To monitor and manage print jobs via a
network environments, use TopAccess. Information about monitoring print jobs from the
TopAccess is provided in the TopAccess Guide.
Features and Functions

The document monitor, TopAccessDocMon, follows the progress of each job from your com-
puter desktop until it is printed on this equipment.
TopAccessDocMon consists of the document monitor and a printer status component.
y The document monitor provides event notification (alerts).
This means that if an event interrupts printing, such as a paper out condition, the monitor dis-
plays an alert.
You can control which events cause TopAccessDocMon to display an alert.
y “Printer status” provides device-summary information and access to the print queues (Print
queue, Private Print queue, Proof Print queue, Scheduled Print queue, Fax queue, e-Filing
queue, and Invalid queue).
How to Use TopAccessDocMon

To monitor the print job using TopAccessDocMon, you must first activate it. Also you can config-
ured the settings how TopAccessDocMon works.
P.342 “Running TopAccessDocMon”
P.344 “Configuring TopAccessDocMon”
Running TopAccessDocMon
To access the TopAccessDocMon window, you must first activate it.
342 Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

P.343 “Starting TopAccessDocMon”
Once you activate TopAccessDocMon, you can access the general functions from the Docu-
ment Monitor menu.
P.343 “Document Monitor Taskbar Menu”
— Starting TopAccessDocMon
First, load TopAccessDocMon so its icon appears on the Windows operating system taskbar.
You only need to do this once.
Starting TopAccessDocMon
1 Click the [Start] menu.
2 Select [TOSHIBA e-STUDIO Client] in the [All Programs] menu, and

click [TopAccessDocMon].
y The TopAccessDocMon icon appears in the taskbar.
— Document Monitor Taskbar Menu

After TopAccessDocMon is activated, you can access its functions from the Document Monitor
menu (displayed by right-clicking on the TopAccessDocMon icon in the taskbar).
The following menus appears in the Document Monitor taskbar menu:

y Disable/Enable — This allows you to enable or disable document monitoring.
To turn on document monitoring, click [Enable] from the Document Monitor menu. The
option changes to Disable and displays the TopAccessDocMon icon on the taskbar. Click
[Disable] to terminate document monitoring.
Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 343

y Configure — This allows you to configure how TopAccessDocMon monitors the devices.
When this is selected, the configuration dialog box appears.
y Exit — This allows you to exit TopAccessDocMon.
y TopAccessDocMon — This allows you to display the TopAccessDocMon window for the
default printer.
P.355 “TopAccessDocMon Window”
y TopAccess — This allows you to access TopAccess on the default printer. This is available
only when the default printer is set to either the e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c
Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO452 Series, e-STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511
Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, e-STUDIO280 Series, GL-1020, or GL-1010.
Configuring TopAccessDocMon
The configuration dialog box allows you to set startup options, select notification events and
methods, display or modify refresh rates, and manually update device discovery settings.
In the configuration dialog box, the following tabs are displayed:
y Startup — This controls whether TopAccessDocMon is launched when starting Windows.
P.344 “Configuring the Start Up Options”
y Notification — This controls which printing events cause a popup message or beep alert.
P.345 “Configuring the Notification”
y Refresh Rates — This controls how often the Document Monitor searches for event notifica-
tions, printer status, and print queue contents in order to refresh the information displayed.
Refresh rates are also known as polling rates.
P.346 “Configuring the Refresh Rates”
y Installed — This shows the network address associated with each installed printer driver.
P.348 “Finding the Printer Address”
Accessing configuration
To display the configuration dialog box, double-clicking on the TopAccessDocMon icon in the
task bar.
To close the dialog box without changing settings, click [Cancel].
— Configuring the Start Up Options

In the Startup tab, you can set TopAccessDocMon to launch when starting Windows.
1) Run the document monitor when starting Windows

Check this to run TopAccessDocMon when starting Windows. When this is checked, the
TopAccessDocMon icon will automatically appear in the task bar every time you start Win-
dows.

— Configuring the Notification
In the Notification tab, you can enable or disable the events notified by TopAccessDocMon.
If you disable SNMP communication in the printer driver, the notification of the TopAccessDoc-
Mon also will be disabled.
1) Events
This sets the events which are notified. To enable or disable the notification of each event,
click the arrow button in the right. The events list is displayed, and you can check on/off
events that enable or disable notification.
- Document has been printed successfully — Check this to notify you when the printer
is finished printing the document.
- Private print document is being held — Check this to notify you when a private print
job that you have sent is ready for you to walk over to the printer and release.
- Proof set has been printed — Check this to notify you when the printer has printed the
first copy of your multi-copy job, which is ready for your review before releasing and print-
ing the remaining copies.
- Fax has been transmitted successfully — Check this to notify you when the printer
has sent a fax when you have sent using the N/W-Fax driver. This is only available when
the Fax option is installed to the devices.
- Document has been cancelled by the printer — Check this to notify you when the
printer has cancelled the job. This can happen when a paper size is not available and
the timeout has expired. This event occurs only when catastrophic circumstances force
the printer to cancel the job, such as a missing byte or memory failure. Expired private
print or proof print jobs are never cancelled by the printer.
- Document cannot be printed due to error — Check this to notify you when the printer
is unable to print the job.
- Printer has a paper jam — Check this to notify you when there is a paper jam in the
printer.
- Fax transmission failure — Check this to notify you when the printer has failed in send-
ing a fax using the N/W-Fax driver. This message apply for e-STUDIO3510c Series,
e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO452 Series, e-STUDIO282
Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series only.
- Document is held as Invalid — Check this to notify you when a print job is held as an
invalid job because of exceeding the limitation for number of copies. This message apply
for e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series,
e-STUDIO452 Series, e-STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450
Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series only.
- Printer is offline — Check this to notify you when the printer is off line. This is only
available for GL-1010, GL-1020, and SC-2.
- Drawer is out of paper — Check this to notify you when one of the printer drawers is out
of paper. This drawer may not be the drawer the printer is using for your job.

- Printer door is open — Check this to notify you when the cover on the printer is open.
- Printer requires attention — Check this to notify you when the printer requires immedi-
ate attention.
- Toner is Empty — Check this to notify you when a toner is empty.
- Used Toner Container is full — Check this to notify you when the used toner container
is full.
- Toner is low — Check this to notify you when the toner become near empty.
2) Method
This sets how TopAccessDocMon notifies you when events occur.
- Popup Dialog — Check this for a popup dialog box.
- Audio (Beep) — Check this for a beep sound.
— Configuring the Refresh Rates

The Refresh Rates tab lets you change the refresh rates for document notification, printer status,
and print queue.
2 3
1) Item/Refresh Rates
This list displays the refresh rate settings for each item. You can change the refresh rate by
selecting the item in this list and clicking [Change Rate...].
2) [Restore Defaults]
Click this to restore the default refresh rate for each item.
3) [Change Rate...]
Select an item in the list and click it to change the refresh rate. The Document Notification,
Printer Status, and Print Queue dialog box appears.
P.346 “Changing the refresh rate”
Changing the refresh rate

The Document Notification, Printer Status, and Print Queue dialog box appears when clicking
[Change Rate...] in the Refresh Rate tab of the configuration dialog box.
When the dialog box appears, select the desired refresh rate using the slide bar. The available
range of the refresh rate varies for each item.

Document Notification
You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 1 minute in units of 10 seconds. The default
refresh rate for the document notification is 30 seconds.
Printer Status
refresh rate for the document notification is 1 minute.
Print Queue
refresh rate for the document notification is 10 seconds.

— Finding the Printer Address

The Installed tab displays the network IP address of each device on your computer that has a
printer driver installed.
1 2 3
1) Printer Name
This displays the printer driver name.
2) Port
This displays the port on your computer to which the printer driver is connected.
3) IP/IPX Address
This displays the IP address or IPX address of the printer the printer driver maps.
4) [Update]
Click this to update the printer address information.
Monitoring the Printer

This section describes how to monitor the printer using the TopAccessDocMon window.
P.348 “How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window”
P.355 “TopAccessDocMon Window”
P.366 “Event Notification”
How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window

To display the TopAccessDocMon window that displays the print job information and printer sta-
tus, access either from the Document Monitor menu or Printers menu.
— Accessing from the Document Monitor Menu

You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the Document Monitor menu and control it
from the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar.
Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Document Monitor menu
1 Right-click the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar.

2 In the menu displayed, select “TopAccessDocMon” to access the
TopAccessDocMon window.
y The TopAccessDocMon window appears.
y TopAccessDocMon displays the TopAccessDocMon window for the printer set as a

default printer in the Printers folder. If the default printer is set to other than the
TOSHIBA printer driver, it displays the error message and the TopAccessDocMon
window cannot be displayed.
y If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver, a message
dialog box appears. In this case, click [Yes] to search for a printer and maintain the
connection.
— Accessing from the Printers File Menu

You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the File menu of the Printers folder. When
you access TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu, the TopAccessDocMon window for
the selected printer.
Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu
1 Open the Printers folder and select the printer driver.
2 Click the [File] menu and select [TopAccessDocMon].
y The TopAccessDocMon window for the selected printer appears.
If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver, a message
dialog box appears. In this case, click [Yes] to search for a printer and maintain the con-
nection.

— Searching for a Printer

When you activate TopAccessDocMon, if the printer driver you select is not connected correctly
to the printer, a message dialog box appears.
In this case, you can use the printer discovery functions to search the printer automatically in the
network, or enter the printer address manually.
P.350 “Finding a printer by searching automatically”
P.352 “Finding a printer by entering printer address manually”
Finding a printer by searching automatically
1 Click [OK] in the message dialog box to find a printer.
y The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.

2 Click [Start Discovery] to begin the process.
y TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network.
y You can quit the process by clicking [Stop Discovery].

y It may not find the device that is located in the different segment. If a device cannot
be found, find a device manually from the [Manual Selection] button.
y If the process continues for a long time, it is because too many network clients are in
the network. Also, you must change the discover settings if you want to search for a
printer in the IPX/SPX network. In these cases, please configure the discovery set-
tings using the [Advanced] button.
P.354 “Configuring Discovery Settings”
When the equipment is connected to the IPX/SPX network of the NDS or NDPS environ-
ment, the equipment cannot be discovered on Windows 98/Me. In this case, please con-
figure the connection manually.
3 When the process is complete, the printers that have been found
are listed in the list.

4 Select the printers that you want to monitor from the list and click
[OK].
y TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and displays the TopAccessDocMon

window.
If you select a different device from the default printer driver (when you run TopAccess-
DocMon by selecting [TopAccessDocMon] from the Document Monitor menu in the task
bar) or the selected printer driver (when you run TopAccessDocMon by selecting a printer
driver in the Printers folder and selecting [TopAccessDocMon] in the File menu), the mes-
sage “This printer is different from default printer. Continue to open TopAccessDocMon,
please click ‘Yes’.” is displayed. If this message is displayed, click [No] and select a cor-
rect device.
Finding a printer by entering printer address manually
1 Click [OK] in the message dialog box to find a printer.
y The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.

2 Click [Manual Selection].
y The Manual Selection dialog box appears.
3 Enter each item to specify the printer address and click [OK].
IPv4 Address — Enter the IPv4 address of the printer.

IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only when the
IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the computer is
connected to the NetWare server.
Name — Enter the printer name.
Location — Enter the location of the printer.
You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.

4 Entered printer is added in the list. Select a printer that you want to
monitor from the list and click [OK].
y TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and display the TopAccessDocMon

window.
If you select a different device from the default printer driver (when you run TopAccess-
DocMon by selecting [TopAccessDocMon] from the Document Monitor menu in the task
bar) or the selected printer driver (when you run TopAccessDocMon by selecting a printer
driver in the Printers folder and selecting [TopAccessDocMon] in the File menu), the mes-
sage “This printer is different from default printer. Continue to open TopAccessDocMon,
please click ‘Yes’.” is displayed. If this message is displayed, click [No] and select a cor-
rect device.
Configuring Discovery Settings

You can configure the discovery settings.
1) Devices
Click the arrow button to display the pull down list and check the model name that you want
to search.
2) Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search
Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX/SPX network. This is available
only when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the
computer is connected to the NetWare server.

3) Network - Enable TCP/IP Search
Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP/IP network. This is available only
when the TCP/IP protocol is installed in your computer.
When this is enabled, select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in the TCP/
IP network.
- Search local subnet — Select this to search for printers in local subnet.
- Specify a range — Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IPv4
addresses or IPv6 addresses. When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in “From”
field and “To” field to specify the range.
TopAccessDocMon Window
In the TopAccessDocMon window, you can monitor print jobs and printer status.
This window consists of:

y A menu bar containing the options Printer, Document, View, and Help. The Device Status tab
includes only the Printer, View and Help menus.
y There are nine (9) possible tabbed views: Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof
Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, TopAccessComposer, and Invalid. The tabs displayed
vary depending on the printer being monitored.
y A status bar containing icons and text that allow you to quickly see the status of the printer.
Menu Bar Options

The options are:
y Printer > Close — Closes the current window.
y Printer > Change Printer — The device names that have been added to the monitoring list
are displayed. You can change the monitoring device by selecting the device name.
P.358 “Changing Monitoring Devices”
y Document > Cancel — This menu is displayed under all queue tab. This item allows you to
delete the print job from the queue. You can only cancel print jobs that you submitted.
y Document > Release Proof — This menu is displayed under the Proof Print tab. This item
displays the Release Proof dialog box where the number of copies to be printed can be
changed and the job released for printing (added to the current jobs print queue). You can
only release jobs that you submitted.
P.363 “Monitoring Queues”

y Document > Print Now — This menu is displayed under the Scheduled Print tab. This item
overrides the assigned print schedule order for a particular job and prints the selected job
immediately.
P.363 “Monitoring Queues”
y Document > Invalid Release — This menu is displayed under the Invalid tab. This item dis-
plays the Invalid Release dialog box where the department code is entered and the job is
released for printing.
y View > Configure — Displays the Configuration window.
y View > Refresh — Renews the window display.
y View > Status Bar — Check or uncheck to display or hide the status bar.
y Help > Contents and Index — Accesses the online help application.
y Help > About TopAccessDocMon — Displays copyright, version, and other information
about the Document Monitor.
Document Monitoring Tabs

The tabs on this window vary depending on the monitoring device:
e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO452 Series,
e-STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series
— Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, and
Invalid
GL-1020 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAc-
cessComposer, and Invalid
GL-1010 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAc-
cessComposer, and Invalid
SC-2 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, and Proof Print.
Other devices (that supports MIB-II, Host Resource MIB, and Printer MIB) — Device Status
y Device Status tab — Displays the printer information.
y Print Queue tab — Displays a list of all current jobs. Using this tab you can display all the
jobs in the print queue, pause and resume printing, and cancel a print job.
y Private Print tab — Lists the confidential print jobs. Using this tab you can display all your
private print jobs and cancel jobs as needed.
y Proof Print tab — Displays details of proof print jobs. Proof print jobs are those for which a
proof copy has already been printed but the balance remaining is being held in this queue.
You can display all proof print jobs that have not been printed, release the rest of the docu-
ment for printing, and cancel a print job — as needed.
y Scheduled Print tab — Displays details of jobs that are being held for printing at a specified
date and time.
y Fax tab — Displays details of fax jobs that are being sent using the N/W-Fax driver.
y e-Filing tab — Displays details of documents that are being stored in Box about one minute.
y TopAccessComposer tab — Displays details of documents that are being stored in TopAc-
cessComposer about one minute.
y Invalid tab — Lists jobs with invalid department codes and jobs exceed the limitation for
number of copies.
Status Bar
The status bar extends along the lower border of the TopAccessDocMon window. The informa-
tion it contains depends upon the tab you’ve chosen.
You can choose whether or not to display the status bar by checking/unchecking the Status Bar
option using the View menu.
1) Status
Located on the left side of the bar, is a phrase that describes the status of the device or job:

- Device Status tab — shows the condition of the printer.
- Print Queue tab — shows the number of documents in the print queue.
- Private Print tab — shows the number of private print jobs.
- Proof Print tab — shows the number of proof print jobs.
- Scheduled Print tab — shows the order of scheduled print jobs for the selected device.
- Fax tab — shows the number of fax jobs.
- e-Filing tab — shows the number of print jobs to be sent to Box.
- TopAccessComposer tab — shows the number of print jobs to be sent to TopAccess-
Composer.
- Invalid — shows the number of print jobs in the Invalid print queue.
2) IP/IPX Address
This item on the taskbar shows the IP address or IPX address for the device connected to
the selected printer.
3) Connection Status
The icon shows the communication status of the printer.
Shows that TopAccessDocMon is communicating with the printer.
Shows that the communications link between TopAccessDocMon and

the printer is broken and displays the message The printer is not
responding.
TopAccessDocMon periodically tries to reestablish the link. How frequently this is done
depends upon the refresh rate.
Warnings display in yellow and errors in red. Clicking the primary icon (the first one) takes
you to the TopAccessDocMon window.
4) Printer Icon
Click the printer icon to update the information.
— Checking Device Status

In the Device Status tab, you can check the printer status.
1 8
2
9
3
4
5
6
7 10
The printer information includes:

1) Printer Image
This displays a visual representation of the printer, showing the device status icon when an
error condition occurs.
P.382 “Device Status Indicators”

2) Name
This displays the name of the printer.
3) Model
This displays the printer model name.
4) Location
This displays the printer’s physical location.
5) Status
This tells you if the machine is ready for printing.
6) Hole Punch
This displays the type of hole punch unit installed.
7) Physical Address
This displays the printer’s machine address (a unique ID provided by the printer’s network
card, also referred to as the hardware address.)
8) Printer Information
This displays the drawer status icon along with the errors, warnings that have been recorded
for the printer, and toner information. Shows drawer status and provides machine information
such as toner low, door open, paper jam, etc. Also it provides the alert and counter informa-
tion.
9) Description (list box below Printer Information)
This highlights the method of recovery for the alert selected above.
10) [Add Device]
Click this to add a new device to be monitored. The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery
dialog box appears.
P.358 “Adding Devices”
— Changing Monitoring Devices

You can change the device to display the details in the TopAccessDocMon window.
To change the device, click the [Printer] menu, [Change Printer], and select the device name of
which the details are displayed in the TopAccessDocMon window.
You can add the device name in the Change Printer menu by clicking [Add Device] in the Device
Status tab.
P.358 “Adding Devices”
— Adding Devices
You can add the devices to be monitored by TopAccessDocMon.
To add the new device, you can use the TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery function. You
can add the printer by automatically searching the printer in your network, or entering the printer
address manually.

Adding new device by searching the printer automatically
1 Click [Add Device] in the Device Status tab.
y The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears.
2 Click [Start Discovery] to begin the process.
y TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network.
y You can quit the process by clicking [Stop Discovery].

y It may not find the device that is located in the different segment. If a device cannot
be found, find a device manually from the [Manual Selection] button.
P.361 “Adding new device by entering the printer address manually”

3 When the process is complete, the printers that have been found
are listed in the “Discovered Device” list.
If the process continues for a long time, it is because too many network clients are on the
network. Also, you must change the discover settings if you want to search for a printer
in the IPX/SPX network. In this case, you can configure the discovery settings using the
[Advanced] button.
P.363 “Configuring Network Discovery Settings”
4 Select the printers that you want to monitor from the “Discovered
Device” list and click [Add].
y The selected printer is added to the “Monitoring Device” list.
You can remove the printers from the “Monitoring Device” list. To do this, select the
printer that you want to remove and click [Remove]. However, you cannot remove the
printers which are related to the installed printer drivers.
5 Click [OK].

Adding new device by entering the printer address manually
1 Click [Add Device] in the Device Status tab.
y The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears.
2 Click [Manual Selection].
y The Manual Selection dialog box appears.

3 Enter each item to specify the printer address.

IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only when the
IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the computer is
connected to the NetWare server.
Name — Enter the printer name.
Location — Enter the location of the printer.
You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.
4 Entered printer is added in the “Monitoring Device” list. Click [OK].

Configuring Network Discovery Settings
You can configure the discovery settings for the Network Discovery in the Discovery Settings
dialog box.
1) Devices - Find TOSHIBA Devices

Check on this to search only for TOSHIBA devices in your network, such as the
e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO452
Series, e-STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, e-STUDIO280
Series, GL-1020, GL-1010 and SC-2.
2) Devices - Find All Devices on the Network
Check on this to search for all compatible devices can be detected.
3) Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search
Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX/SPX network. This is available
only when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the
computer is connected to the NetWare server.
4) Network - Enable TCP/IP Search
Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP/IP network. This is available only
when the TCP/IP protocol is installed in your computer.
When this is enabled, select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in the TCP/
IP network.
- Search local subnet — Select this to search for printers in local subnet.
- Specify a range — Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IPv4
addresses or IPv6 addresses. When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in the
“From” field and “To” field to specify the range.
— Monitoring Queues
Each of the TopAccessDocMon job status tabs display essentially the same information.
The Queue tabs on the TopAccessDocMon window are vary depending on the monitoring
device:
e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO452 Series,
e-STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, and Invalid
GL-1020 — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAccessComposer,
and Invalid
GL-1010 — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAccessComposer,
and Invalid
SC-2 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, and Proof Print.
Job status information

y Document Name — is the name of the document that is printing.

y Status — is the state or condition of the job.

y Scheduled — for Scheduled Print jobs, this item displays the date and time the job is sched-
uled to print in localized form.
y User Name — identifies who submitted the job.
y Pages — shows the pages in the job and number of pages printed.
y Submitted — is the date and time that the print job was submitted.
y Copies — this item contains the number of copies requested.
In each queue tab, you can delete a print job that you originally submitted.
In addition, in the Proof Print tab, you can print the remaining copies of proof print jobs. In the
Scheduled Print tab, you can print the selected scheduled job immediately. In the Invalid tab,
you can print the selected job by entering the department code.
Deleting print jobs
1 Display the queue tab and select a print job that you want to delete.
You can delete the print job only that you originally submitted.
2 Click [Document] menu and select [Cancel].
y The selected job is deleted.
Releasing proof print documents
1 Display the Proof Print tab and select a proof print job that you
want to print of remaining copies.
You can release the proof print job only that you originally submitted.

2 Click [Document] menu and select [Release Proof].
y The Release Proof dialog box appears.
3 Enter the number of copies and click [OK].

y The remaining copies of the proof print job are printed.
Releasing scheduled print documents immediately
1 Display the Scheduled Print tab and select a scheduled print job
that you want to print immediately.
You can release the scheduled print job only that you originally submitted.
2 Click [Document] menu and select [Print Now].
y The selected scheduled print job is immediately printed.

Releasing invalid print documents
1 Display the Invalid Print tab and select a print job that you want to
print.
y You can release the print job only that you originally submitted.
y The invalid jobs for exceeding the limitation for number of copies cannot be released.
2 Click [Document] menu and select [Invalid Release].
y The Invalid Release dialog box appears.
3 Enter the 5-digit department code and click [OK].
y The selected invalid print job is printed.
Event Notification
When an event occurs that has been assigned alert status (selected for notification), a popup
notification dialog box appears. This popup message contains the following information about
the event:

If you did not select Popup Message as the notification method, you will not see a popup notifi-
cation dialog box.
y Date/Time — displays the date and time of the document.

y Document — displays the name of the document.
y Message — displays the event notification message.
y Notification Number — displays the sequential order of the current message in the notifica-
tion queue. For example, 3/8 indicates that it is the third message in a queue of eight notifi-
cations.
y — Click this to display the first notification dialog box in the queue.
y — Click this to display the previous notification dialog box in the queue.
y — Click this to display the next notification dialog box in the queue.
y — Click this to display the last notification dialog box in the queue.
y [Close] — closes the window.

10. Troubleshooting
This section describes about troubleshooting for printing features.
When Printing cannot be Performed...................................................................370

Printer Driver Errors .............................................................................................371
Printer Driver Installation Error Messages ......................................................................................371
Printer Driver General Errors ..........................................................................................................372
TopAccessDocMon Errors ...................................................................................375

TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions ..............................................................................................375
TopAccessDocMon Error Messages ...............................................................................................376
Device Status Indicators..................................................................................................................382
10 Troubleshooting
When Printing cannot be Performed
This problem can arise as the result of a hardware malfunction, a network communication or
configuration problem. Before troubleshooting the client error, ask your administrator to trouble-
shoot the hardware or network errors. Those troubleshooting are described in the Network
Administration Guide.
The following checklist helps you identify the source of the error and directs to you where you
can find more information about resolving it.
Client Error for Windows Platform

For Instruction, Go
No Check... Yes No
To...
1 Have you ever printed success- Next Step P.372 “Driver Mapped to
Ö
fully from this client workstation? Ø Wrong Port”
2 Do you set up the printer driver Next Step P.373 “Cannot Print a
Ö
other than a SMB connection? Ø Job Using SMB”
3 Open TopAccessDocMon and P.375 “The Device is Not

note the taskbar connection icon Next Step Responding”
Ö
and status bar message. Is this Ø
equipment responding?
4 Try resubmitting the job. Does P.376 “Cannot Interpret

the printer status read “Docu- End Ö TopAccessDocMon Mes-
ment has printed successfully”? sages/Warning/Errors”
Client Error for Macintosh Platform

For Instruction, Go
No Check... Yes No
To...
1 Is this equipment you created P.168 “Installing the
End Ö
selected in the Chooser? Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x”
Print Job Status Messages

The status and result of the print jobs is indicated as following in the Print Job page in the Job
Status tab and Print Log page in the Logs tab.
Error Code Cause Corrective Action

PM size error 1200 dpi print jobs cannot be printed without
402F the optional expansion memory. Send a print
job with a 600 dpi setting.
HDD full error Delete unnecessary private print jobs and

4031
invalid department print jobs.
A221 Job canceled (Job was canceled.)
Power failure Check if the power cable is connected properly

A222 and it is inserted securely. Check if the power
voltage is unstable.
370 When Printing cannot be Performed

Printer Driver Errors
Printer Driver Installation Error Messages
Setup Needs to Copy Windows NT Files

Problem Description
The wrong port type was selected from the Printer Ports dialog.
Corrective Action
1. Click Cancel until the Add Printer Wizard terminates.
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder but, when prompted to select a port, choose
Local Port.
Client Software CD Now Required

Problem Description
When adding a new printer driver, the end user did not choose the Have Disk option; instead, he
selected the printer name from the Add Printer list.
Corrective Action
1. Cancel the Add Printer Wizard.
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder but, when prompted to locate the driver,
click Have Disk.
3. Select Use Existing Driver to add another copy of an existing driver or browse to the subdi-
rectory that contains the appropriate *.inf file.
File *.DRV on Client CD Not Be Found

Problem Description
When adding a new printer driver, the user did not choose the Have Disk option but selected the
printer name from the Add Printer list.
Corrective Action
1. Cancel the Add Printer Wizard.
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder, but when prompted to locate the driver,
click Have Disk.
3. Browse to the subdirectory that contains the appropriate *.inf file.
Location Does Not Contain Information About Your Hardware

Problem Description
The path to the *.inf file selected during driver installation is too far away. In other words, there
are too many characters in the directory path.
Corrective Action
Copy the directory containing the *.inf file to the local drive and resume installation.
Printer Driver Errors 371

10 Troubleshooting
This Port is Currently in Use

Problem Description
The driver was either open, printing a job, or is in use by another printer or application, when you
attempted to delete it.
Corrective Action
Make sure all print jobs have completed before deleting a port. If there are still problems, exit all
applications and try again. Check each driver to see if another driver is using the same port. If
so, first change the driver’s port setting and delete the port.
Problem with the Current Printer Setup

Problem Description
The driver was not set up properly, possibly because the installation procedure did not complete.
Corrective Action
Delete the driver and either reinstall it from the distribution CD-ROM or download it from this
equipment.
Printer Driver General Errors
Driver Mapped to Wrong Port

Problem Description
If the printer driver on a client workstation points to the wrong network port, jobs do not appear in
the current jobs queue or print out.
Corrective Action
1. Open the Printers folder from the Control Panel.
2. Right-click the printer driver icon.
3. Select Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Depending on the operating system, select the following tab:
- In Windows 98/Me — Select Details. Browse to select the printer or Novell queue.
- In Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003 — Select Ports. Add a new port and map it to
the printer.
5. Make sure that the path to the printer and the device name are correct.
\\<device name>\print
- Where <device name> is the same as the device name set from the Touch Panel Display.
6. Click the General Tab and click Print Test Page to confirm that the settings are correct.
Command Line Options Not Processed

Problem Description
All print options are sent to this equipment at the start of the print job. If the print file already con-
tains print commands, they override the command line options you set. For example, if the print
file specifies the Letter media, and you specify the A4 media option with the lp command, the
document is output on letter size paper (provided, of course, that all copier-related restrictions
have been met).
372 Printer Driver Errors

Corrective Action
Change the properties in the document you want to print and recreate the print file. Submit the
print job using the LP command without setting additional parameters.
Cannot Remember Document Password

Problem Description
There is no way to obtain the password for a Private Print job after it has been sent. A private
print job remains in the queue until the correct Document Password is entered.
Corrective Action
The end user must delete the job from the Touch Panel Display or through TopAccessDocMon
and resubmit the Private Print job using a new password. Encourage the user to write down the
password so they can enter it to retrieve their jobs from the Touch Panel Display.
Retrieval of Printer Configuration Failed

Problem Description
When accessing the printer properties, the system displayed “Retrieval of printer configuration
failed”.
Corrective Action
If the printer driver cannot communicate with this equipment — Verify that the system is running.
If not, turn it on. Connect to this equipment via TopAccess. If you cannot connect, reboot this
equipment. If that fails, check the printer driver port assignment to make sure it is correct.
Cannot Print a Job Using SMB

Problem Description
When printing a document using a SMB connection, the job cannot be printed because an error
such as “No more connections can be made to this remote computer” and “Your file could not be
printed due to an error” are continuously displayed.
Corrective Action
2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is recommended to set up for
printing via Windows print server. For further information about setting up printing via a Win-
dows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.
If you cannot use a Windows print server in your network, use LPR printing for Windows NT 4.0/
2000/XP/Server 2003.
Cannot Print a Job as Expected Using PS Printer Driver

Problem Description
When printing with the PS3 printer driver from the application that creates the PostScript code
for printing such as Adobe Acrobat, the following print options may not work correctly.
y Manual Scale
y Print Paper Size
y Paper Type
y User Front Cover
Printer Driver Errors 373

10 Troubleshooting
y User Back Cover

y Interleave Pages
y Insert Pages
y Booklet
y Multiple Pages per Sheet
y All options in the Effect tab
y All options in the Image Quality tab
Corrective Action
Disable “Use PostScript Passthrough” in the PostScript Settings dialog box and print a docu-
ment.
Cannot Change Settings on Fonts Tab and Configuration Tab

Problem Description
The Fonts tab and Configuration tab are grayed out and they cannot be modified.
Corrective Action
Users who do not have the privilege to change the printer driver setting cannot change the
options in the Fonts tab and Configuration tab. Please log in with Administrator or Power User.
Cannot Print Properly by AppleTalk Printing

Problem Description
y Texts will be printed as the stripe lines when printing the email message.
y Some texts are not printed.
y A web page is not printed although the print job is sent to the equipment when printing from
a browser.
Corrective Action
If the above errors occur by AppleTalk printing, please use LPR printing.
374 Printer Driver Errors

TopAccessDocMon Errors
This section describes about the error conditions and messages of TopAccessDocMon.
P.375 “TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions”
P.376 “TopAccessDocMon Error Messages”
P.382 “Device Status Indicators”
TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions

Refer to the corrective action for the following error conditions.
P.375 “The Device is Not Responding”
P.375 “Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue”
P.376 “Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages/Warning/Errors”
The Device is Not Responding

Problem Description
The status bar reads, “The device is not responding” and the broken connection icon is dis-
played in the taskbar.
Technically, this icon means that the SNMP manager on the client machine cannot communicate
with the SNMP agent on this equipment. Several error conditions can cause this status:
y The network connection between the client and the device has been broken.
y The device IP Address has changed and the client is still using the old address.
y The device is currently rebooting.
y The SNMP agent on the device is not functioning properly or has stopped functioning.
Corrective Action
1. Make sure that the SNMP Network Service is enabled from the Network Setup page in the
TopAccess Administrator mode.
2. Wait for a couple of minutes. Most of the time, the connection is reestablished automatically.
3. If the broken connection condition persists, exit and restart TopAccessDocMon.
4. If, upon restarting TopAccessDocMon, you receive a message that the address cannot be
resolved, manually discover and select the device.
Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue

Problem Description
After submitting a job to print, there are several reasons why you may not see the job in the print
queue:
y The wrong device selected.
y The job is queued on the Windows operating system print spooler.
y The job may be held in the Novell print queue.
y A copier error prevents printing.
Corrective Action
y Check the device location to see if there really should be any jobs listed.
y Check the Jobs Log in TopAccess to see if the status of the job is listed as Done, Deleted, or
Unserviceable.
y If the job is very small, it may have already been serviced and moved to the Jobs Log as a
terminated job. If the job was unserviceable for some reason, it no longer appears in the
under Current Jobs list.
y Look at the Touch Panel Display for error messages. For instance, a prompt to load paper
holds up subsequent jobs in the queue.
TopAccessDocMon Errors 375

10 Troubleshooting
y In a Peer to Peer environment, the job may be queued on the Microsoft Windows operating
system print spooler and, consequently, not available in Current Jobs or the Jobs Log. If you
do not see any error messages and the printer seems to be working fine, resubmit the job.
y The job may be in the Novell print queue and thus, not visible for the moment. Use NWAdmin
or PCONSOLE to see if there are any queue errors.
Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages/Warning/

Errors
Problem Description
The device status indicates the current state of the copier to which print jobs are being submit-
ted.
Corrective Action
For an explanation of device status messages, refer to the following section.
P.376 “TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages”
P.377 “TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages”
TopAccessDocMon Error Messages

When the error message or printer status message is displayed, refer to the following section to
find your corrective action.
P.376 “TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages”
P.377 “TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages”
TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages

The following table shows the notification messages displayed and helps you to find more infor-
mation about resolving it.
Message Description
Your document has been User has sent a print job and it has finished printing successfully.
printed.
Your private print document is User has sent a private print job and it is ready for the user to walk to copier and activate
now being held. the job.
Your proof set has been User has sent a proof copy of a multi-copy job has printed, and it is ready for the user to
printed. review before releasing and printing the remaining copies.
Your fax has been transmitted User has sent a fax job and it has finished faxing successfully.
successfully.
Your document has been User had sent a print job and it has been changed to a cancelled state. This can hap-
cancelled. pen when a paper size is not available and the timeout has expired. Ensure proper
paper has been set to this equipment and resubmit the job.
If this message is notified after sending a private, proof, or scheduled print job, the pri-
vate or proof print job was cancelled before it was put into a held state. This may occur
because of a missing byte or memory failure. In this case, ask your administrator to
maintain the available hard disk space to store the jobs, or delete the unnecessary jobs
stored and resubmit the job.
Your document cannot be User has sent a print job and it was rendered unserviceable by this equipment. Make
printed due to error. sure you use the correct printer driver.
376 TopAccessDocMon Errors

Message Description
Fax transmission failure The transmission of a fax job that was sent using N/W-Fax driver failed. Make sure you
specify the correct destinations.
Document is held as invalid The print job is held as an invalid job because of exceeding the limitation for number of
copies. Make sure you specify the number of copies that does not exceed the limitation.
The printer has a paper jam. A paper jam has occurred. Remove the jam and resubmit the job.
The printer is offline. The printer is offline. This may be displayed by monitoring other TOSHIBA device, such
as GL-1020, GL-1010, SC-2, so on. Turn the printer online and resubmit the job.
The printer is out of paper. One of the drawers is out of paper. Add paper.
The printer door is open. One of the doors is opened. Close the door.
The printer requires attention. An error has occurred. Go to the Touch Panel Display to see the type of error. For more
details on resolving the error, refer to the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function or
consult your network administrator.
The yellow toner is Empty. One of the toner cartridges is empty. Replace it.
The magenta toner is Empty. Toner Empty message for yellow, magenta, cyan toners are displayed only for e-
The cyan toner is Empty. STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series and e-STUDIO4511 Series.
The black toner is Empty.
The used toner container is The toner bag is full. Replace the toner bag.
full.
The yellow toner is low. One of the toner cartridges is low. Replace it.
The magenta toner is low. Toner Empty message for yellow, magenta, cyan toners are displayed only for e-
The cyan toner is low. STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series and e-STUDIO4511 Series.
The black toner is low.
TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages

The following table shows the printer status messages displayed in the Device Status tab and
helps you to find more information about resolving it.
Status Details Description

Paper Empty Paper Empty in Drawer 1 - Please Add Paper Add paper in the Drawer 1.
Paper Empty in Drawer 2 - Please Add Paper Add paper in the Drawer 2.
Paper Empty in Large Capacity Feeder - Please Add paper in the Large Capacity Feeder.
Add Paper.
Paper Empty in Bypass Tray - Please Add Paper. Add paper in the Bypass Tray.

10 Troubleshooting

Cover Open Platen Cover Open - Please Close Cover Close the Platen Cover.
Front Cover Open - Please Close Cover. Close the Front Cover.
Paper Feeding Cover Open - Please Close Cover. Close the Paper Feeding Cover.
Transfer/Transport Unit Open - Please Close Close the Transfer/Transport Unit.

Cover.
Lower Side Cover Open - Please Close Cover. Close the LCF Feeding Cover.
Drawer Open - Please Close Cover. Close the Drawer Cover.
Automatic Document Feeder Cover Open - Please Close the Automatic Document Feeder cover.
Close Cover.
Relay Unit Cover Open - Please Close Cover. Close the Relay Unit Cover.
Finisher Door Open - Please Close Door. Close the Finisher Door.
Lower Tray Delivery Cover Open - Please Close Close the Lower Tray Delivery Cover.
Cover.
Lower Tray Front Cover Open - Please Close Close the Lower Tray Front Cover.
Cover.
Hole Punch Unit Front Cover Open - Please Close Close the Punch Unit Front Cover.
Cover.
Hole Punch Unit Cover Open - Please Close Close the Punch Unit Cover.
Cover.
Inserter Unit Cover Open - Please Close Cover Close the Inserter Unit Cover.
Exit Cover Open - Please Close Cover Close the Exit Cover.
Job Separator Cover Open - Please Close Cover. Close the Job Separator Cover.
This error message is only displayed for
e-STUDIO452 Series, e-STUDIO282 Series,
e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series.
Offset Tray Cover Open - Please Close Cover. Close the Offset Tray Cover.
Automatic Duplexing Unit Cover Open - Please Close the Automatic Duplexing Unit Cover.
Close Cover.
Lower Tray Transport Cover Open- Please Close Close the Lower Tray Transport Cover.
Cover
Bypass Cover Open - Please Close Cover Close the Bypass Cover. The error message is
only displayed for e-STUDIO850 Series.
Toner Cover Open - Please Close Cover Close the Toner Cover. This error message is only
displayed for e-STUDIO850 Series.

Paper Jam Paper Jam in Automatic Document Feeder - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Please Clear Paper Path remove jammed paper.
Paper Jam in Bypass Tray - Please Clear Paper Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Path remove jammed paper.
Paper Jam in Drawer 1 - Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
remove jammed paper.
Paper Jam in Large Capacity Feeder - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Clear Paper Path remove jammed paper.
Paper Jam in Finisher - Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Paper Jam in Printer - Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Paper Jam in Job Separator - Please Clear Paper Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Path. remove jammed paper.
Paper Jam in Offset Tray - Please Clear Paper Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Path. remove jammed paper.
Paper Ejection Jam - Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Paper Insertion Jam - Please Clear Paper Path Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Paper Jam in Automatic Duplexing Unit - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Clear Paper Path remove jammed paper.
Paper Jam in Inserter Unit - Please Clear Paper Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Path remove jammed paper.
e-STUDIO850 Series.
Paper Jam in External Large Capacity Feeder - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Please Clear Paper Path remove jammed paper.
e-STUDIO850 Series.
Toner Full Used Toner Container Full - Please Replace. Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
replace the Toner Container.

10 Troubleshooting

Toner Empty Black Toner Empty - Please Replace. Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
replace the Black Toner.
Cyan Toner Empty - Please Replace. Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
replace the Cyan Toner.
e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series
and e-STUDIO4511 Series.
Magenta Toner Empty - Please Replace. Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
replace the Magenta Toner.
e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c and e-
STUDIO4511 Series.
Yellow Toner Empty - Please Replace. Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
replace the Yellow Toner.
STUDIO4511 Series.
Toner Near Black Toner Cartridge Low - Please Install New Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Empty Cartridge Before System is Empty. replace the Black Toner.
Cyan Toner Cartridge Low - Please Install New Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Cartridge Before System is Empty. replace the Cyan Toner.
STUDIO4511 Series.
Magenta Toner Cartridge Low - Please Install New Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Cartridge Before System is Empty. replace the Magenta Toner.
STUDIO4511 Series.
Yellow Toner Cartridge Low - Please Install New Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display to
Cartridge Before System is Empty. replace the Yellow Toner.
STUDIO4511 Series.
Staple Empty Staple Empty - Please Set Staple Cartridge Set the Staple Cartridge. Refer to the Operator’s
Manual for Basic Function for instruction.
Finisher’s Lower Tray Staples are Empty - Please Set the Saddle Staple Cartridge. Refer to the
Replace Staple Cartridge Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for
instruction.

Printer Error Finisher Disconnected - Please Join Finisher to Join the Finisher to the copier stably.
Copier.
Hole Punch Jam in Finisher - Please Clear Hole Clear hole punches from the Finisher. Refer to the
Punch Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for
instruction.
Staple Jam in Finisher - Please Clear Staple Remove jammed staples from the Finisher. Refer
to the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for
instruction.
Staple Jam in Lower Tray of Finisher - Please Remove jammed staples from the Saddle Stitch
Clear Staple Finisher. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for
Basic Function for instruction.
Toner Not Recognized - Please Check Toner Check and adjust the toner bottle.
Finisher Lower Tray Full - Please Remove Paper Remove paper from the Lower Tray of Saddle
Stitch Finisher.
Mixed Sized Paper not Allowed - Please Check Check the paper.
Paper
Finisher Tray 1 Paper Full - Please Remove Paper. Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 1.
Finisher Tray 2 Paper Full - Please Remove Paper. Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 2.
Inner Tray Paper Full - Please Remove Paper. Remove paper from the Inner Tray.
e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and
e-STUDIO280 Series.
Hole Punch Full in Finisher- Please Clear Hole Dispose the punched paper bits. Refer to the
Punch. Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for
instruction.
Job Separator Upper Paper Full - Please Remove Remove paper form the Job Separator Upper Tray.
Paper. This error message is only displayed for
Job Separator Lower Paper Full - Please Remove Remove paper from the Job Separator Lower Tray.
Paper. This error message is only displayed for
Offset Tray Full - Please Remove Paper. Remove paper from the Offset Tray.
Printer Output Error - Please Contact Service Contact your service representative.
Technician.
Printer Input Error - Please Contact Service Tech- Contact your service representative.
nician.
Time for Slit Glass and Main Charger Cleaning - Contact your service representative.
Please Clean Slit Glass and Main Charger This error message is only displayed for
e-STUDIO3510c Series.

10 Troubleshooting

Contact Ser- Automatic Document Feeder Error - Please Con- Contact your service representative.
vice Techni- tact Service Technician.
cian
Alignment Error in Automatic Document Feeder - Contact your service representative.
Please Contact Service Technician.
Motor Error in Automatic Document Feeder - Contact your service representative.

Please Contact Service Technician.
I/F Error in Automatic Document Feeder - Please Contact your service representative.
Contact Service Technician.
Fatal Error - Please Contact Service Technician. Contact your service representative.
Main Motor Error - Please Contact Service Techni- Contact your service representative.
cian.
Fuser Error - Please Contact Service Technician. Contact your service representative.
Scanner Error - Please Contact Service Techni- Contact your service representative.
cian.
Motor Error - Please Contact Service Technician. Contact your service representative.
HDD Error - Please Contact Service Technician. Contact your service representative.
The Time for Periodic Maintenance - Please Con- Contact your service representative.
tact Service Technician.
Device Status Indicators

The Printer Image area for the TopAccessDocMon Device tab window displays visual Device
Status Indicators in the event of a device malfunction.
y Printer Error 1
The above printer error icon indicate that non-recommended toner is being used. For infor-
mation on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE SYMBOL”
in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
y Printer Error 2
The above printer error icon indicates:

- You need to remove paper from standard output tray.
- You need to remove paper from Job Separator.(Only for e-STUDIO3510c Series,
e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO452 Series, e-STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511
Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO230 Series)
- You need to remove paper from Finisher tray.
- You need to remove staples jammed in the Finisher. For information on resolving the
error condition, refer to “CLEAR PAPER SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic
Function.
- You need to clear hole punches from Finisher. For information on resolving the error con-
dition, refer to “DISPOSING OF THE PUNCHED PAPER BITS (OPTIONAL)” in Opera-
tor’s Manual for Basic Function.

- Non-recommended toner is being used. For information on resolving the error condition,
refer to “REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic
Function.
- You need to remove excess staples from the Saddle Stitch Finisher.
- You performed saddle stitch printing using mixed paper sizes.
- Cannot load paper from the LCF.
- Cannot output to inner tray. (Only for e-STUDIO3510c Series, e-STUDIO451c Series,
e-STUDIO452 Series, e-STUDIO282 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450
Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series).
y Cover Open
The Cover Open error icon indicates that you need to close the cover.
y Drawer Open
The Drawer Open error icon shows that drawer is open. You must close the specified drawer
to resume printing and copying functions.
y Toner Empty
The color of the Toner Empty icon varies depending on which toner cartridge is empty:
- Black — Black Toner Empty
- Cyan — Cyan Toner Empty
- Magenta — Magenta Toner Empty
- Yellow — Yellow Toner Empty
For information on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE
SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
y Toner Full
The Toner Full error icon indicates you need to replace the toner container. For information
on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER BAG SYMBOL” in Operator’s
Manual for Basic Function.
y Paper Empty
The Out of Paper error icon shows that drawer is empty. A paper out condition does not nec-
essarily terminate a print or copy job. If Auto-select options are configured, printing and
copying may continue by drawing paper from a different drawer. Refer to the TopAccess
online Help for instructions on setting up Auto-Select mode. For information on resolving the
error condition, refer to “ADD PAPER SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.

10 Troubleshooting
y Paper Jam
The Paper Jam icon indicates that you need to remove jammed paper from the equipment.
For information on resolving the error condition, refer to “CLEAR PAPER SYMBOL” in Oper-
ator’s Manual for Basic Function.
y Staple Empty
The Add Staples error icon indicates you need to add staples to the finisher. For information
on resolving the error condition, refer to “ADDING STAPLES (OPTIONAL)” in Operator’s
Manual for Basic Function.
y Serviceman Calls
The Service Call error icon indicates that a call for service is needed. Contact your service
representative.

Appendix
11.
This section describe about the following contents.
Managing Fonts with Font Manager....................................................................386

Installing Font Manager...................................................................................................................386
Searching Fonts ..............................................................................................................................386
Installing Fonts in Windows.............................................................................................................386
Uninstalling Fonts in Windows ........................................................................................................387
Removing Fonts from the Computer ...............................................................................................387
Displaying Font Preview..................................................................................................................387
Creating a Font Group ....................................................................................................................388
Sorting Fonts in the List ..................................................................................................................388
Internal Fonts List.................................................................................................390

Internal PCL Fonts List....................................................................................................................390
Internal PS Fonts List......................................................................................................................391
11 Appendix
Managing Fonts with Font Manager

The Font Manager program can be used to manage your fonts in Windows. This program can
be launch by clicking [Run Font Manager] on the Fonts tab of the printer driver.
It can:
y Search your local and network drives for fonts.
y Install and uninstall fonts in Windows.
y Remove fonts from your computer.
y Preview or print the fonts on your computer or network.
y Create font groups for personal or workgroup projects.
y Sort your fonts in a variety of ways, etc.
Installing Font Manager

The Font Manager can be installed from the Font CD-ROM that comes with the Printer Kit or
Printer/Scanner Kit. To install the Font Manager, double-click the “Setup.exe” file in the Font
CD-ROM and follow the screens.
Searching Fonts
The first time you start Font Manager, the Find Fonts dialog box appears automatically. Before
installing a font in Windows, you have to search the available fonts that can be installed by Font
Manager 2000.
Searching fonts
1 Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Search for Fonts...].

y The Find Fonts dialog box appears.
2 Select which drive you want to search for fonts.

Selected Drives — Select this to choose one of the drives when searching for fonts.
All Drives — Select this to search on all drives when searching for fonts.
Selected Paths — Select this to enter the path to the drive when searching for fonts.
Enter the path to the drive you want to search when you select this.
3 Click [OK].
y When you select “Selected Drives”, Continue to the next step.
y When you select “All Drives”, skip to Step 6.
y When you select “Selected Paths”, skip to Step 6.
4 The Select Drives dialog box appears.
5 Select a drive to search for fonts from the list and click [OK].
6 Searching for fonts begins. The Search for fonts... dialog box is dis-
played while searching for fonts.
y If you cancel to search for fonts, click [Stop].
7 The searched fonts are displayed at the Available Font list.
Installing Fonts in Windows

After searching the fonts, you can install them in Windows. Once the fonts are installed in Win-
dows, the fonts can be displayed on the dialog box in applications and printed by the machine.
386 Managing Fonts with Font Manager

Installing the TrueType fonts
1 Highlight the fonts you want to install in Windows from the “Avail-
able Font List”.
2 Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Install].
3 The fonts are installed in Windows and added to the installed fonts
list.
Uninstalling Fonts in Windows

You can uninstall the fonts in Windows. However, even if you uninstall the fonts from Windows,
the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted from the drive.
Uninstalling the TrueType fonts
1 Highlight the fonts you want to uninstall from Windows from the
installed fonts list.
2 Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Un-install].
3 The fonts are uninstalled from Windows. The uninstalled fonts are
added to the “Available Fonts List”.
Removing Fonts from the Computer

You can remove from your computer the fonts that no longer be required. Even if you uninstall
the fonts from Windows, the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted from the hard
drive. You can remove the sources of the uninstalled fonts from your computer by this function.
Before removing the fonts, the fonts must be uninstalled from Windows first.
Removing the TrueType font files from your computer
1 Highlight the fonts you want to remove from your computer in the
installed fonts list.
2 Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Remove Font].
3 The Remove Fonts dialog box appears.
4 Check on the box for “Delete font(s) from the hard disk” and click
[OK].
y If you do not check on the checkbox for “Delete font(s) from the hard disk”, the source
of the fonts are not deleted from the hard disk. If you want to remove the fonts from
the Available Font List but do not want to delete the source file, do not check this
checkbox.
5 The source files of the fonts are deleted from the hard drive.
Displaying Font Preview

You can preview the fonts that are displayed in the Available Font List and the installed fonts list.
Managing Fonts with Font Manager 387

11 Appendix
Previewing fonts
1 Highlight a font you want to preview from the Available Font List or
the installed fonts list.
2 Click [Fonts] menu and select [Preview].
3 The Preview dialog box appears. The sample font is displayed on

the dialog box.
Point Size — You can select the point size of the sample font displayed.
Normal Styles — When this is selected, the font is displayed in the normal face on the
dialog box.
All Styles — When this is selected, the font is displayed in all of its available font faces in
the dialog box.
Creating a Font Group

You can create a group of fonts and give a descriptive name to the group. The created group
can be used to install or uninstall the fonts in Windows. This function can be used to configure
the different working scenarios of the fonts for each user.
Creating a font group
1 Select the Font Groups folder and click the [Fonts] menu and select
[New Group...].
y The New Group dialog box appears.
2 Enter the group name in the Group Name field.
3 In the All Available Fonts, expand each folder and select the fonts
that you want to add to the group.
4 Click [Add>>].
y The selected fonts are added to the Fonts in Group list.
5 Click [OK].
6 The created group is added to the Font Groups list.
Sorting Fonts in the List

You can sort and change the order of fonts to be displayed in the Available Font and Installed
Fonts list.
Sorting by Name
Click the [Sort] menu and click [Sort by Name]. The fonts are listed alphabetically by the font
family name.
Sorting by Font Type

Click the [Sort] menu and click [Sort by Font Type]. The fonts are grouped according to their
technology type (TrueType, Type 1, or screen bitmap) and within each group the names will be
listed alphabetically.
388 Managing Fonts with Font Manager

Inverting the Alphabetical Order
The lists can be inverted by clicking on the [Sort] menu and [Inverse Sort].
Managing Fonts with Font Manager 389

11 Appendix
Internal Fonts List

Internal PCL Fonts List
0 Courier 40 Helvetica-BoldOblique
1 CG-Times 41 Helvetica-Narrow
2 CG-Times Bold 42 Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
3 CG-Times Italic 43 Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
4 CG-Times Bold Italic 44 Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
5 CG Omega 45 Palatino-Roman
6 CG Omega Bold 46 Palatino-Bold
7 CG Omega Italic 47 Palatino-Italic
8 CG Omega Bold Italic 48 Palatino-BoldItalic
9 Coronet 49 ITC AvantGarde-Book
10 Clarendon Condensed 50 ITC AvantGarde-BookOblique
11 Univers Medium 51 ITC AvantGarde-Demi
12 Univers Bold 52 ITC AvantGarde-DemiOblique
13 Univers Italic 53 ITC Bookman-Light
14 Univers Bold Italic 54 ITC Bookman-LightItalic
15 Univers Medium Condensed 55 ITC Bookman-Demi
16 Univers Condensed Bold 56 ITC Bookman-DemiItalic
17 Univers Medium Condensed Italic 57 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
18 Univers Condensed Bold Italic 58 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
19 Antique Olive 59 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
20 Antique Olive Bold 60 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
21 Antique Olive Italic 61 Times-Roman
22 Garamond Antiqua 62 Times-Bold
23 Garamond Halbfett 63 Times-Italic
24 Garamond Kursiv 64 Times-BoldItalic
25 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 65 ITCZapfChancery-MediumItalic
26 Mrigold 66 Symbol
27 Albertus Medium 67 Symbol PS
28 Albertus Extra Bold 68 Wingdings
29 Arial 69 ITCZapfDingbats
30 Arial Bold 70 Courier Bold
31 Arial Italic 71 Courier Italic
32 Arial Bold Italic 72 Courier Bold Italic
33 Times New Roman 73 Letter Gothic Regular
34 Times New Roman Bold 74 Letter Gothic Bold
35 Times New Roman Italic 75 Letter Gothic Italic
36 Times New Roman Bold Italic 76 CourierPS
37 Helvetica 77 CourierPS Oblique
38 Helvetica-Bold 78 CourierPS Bold
39 Helvetica-Oblique 79 CourierPS BoldOblique
390 Internal Fonts List

Internal PS Fonts List
AlbertusMT-Light Eurostile-ExtendedTwo
AlbertusMT Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo
AlbertusMT-Italic Geneva
AntiqueOlive-Roman GillSans-Light
AntiqueOlive-Italic GillSans-LightItalic
AntiqueOlive-Bold GillSans
AntiqueOlive-Compact GillSans-Italic
Apple-Chancery GillSans-Bold
ArialMT GillSans-BoldItalic
Arial-ItalicMT GillSans-ExtraBold
Arial-BoldMT GillSans-BoldCondensed
Arial-BoldItalicMT GillSans-Condensed
AvantGarde-Book Goudy
AvantGarde-BookOblique Goudy-Italic
AvantGarde-Demi Goudy-Bold
AvantGarde-DemiOblique Goudy-BoldItalic
Bodoni Goudy-ExtraBold
Bodoni-Italic Helvetica
Bodoni-Bold Helvetica-Oblique
Bodoni-BoldItalic Helvetica-Bold
Bodoni-Poster Helvetica-BoldOblique
Bodoni-PosterCompressed Helvetica-Condensed
Bookman-Light Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique
Bookman-LightItalic Helvetica-Condensed-Bold
Bookman-Demi Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl
Bookman-DemiItalic Helvetica-Narrow
Candid Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
Chicago Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
Clarendon-Light Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
Clarendon HoeflerText-Regular
Clarendon-Bold HoeflerText-Italic
CooperBlack HoeflerText-Black
CooperBlack-Italic HoeflerText-BlackItalic
Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC HoeflerText-Ornaments
Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC JoannaMT
Coronet-Regular JoannaMT-Italic
Courier JoannaMT-Bold
Courier-Oblique JoannaMT-BoldItalic
Courier-Bold LetterGothic
Courier-BoldOblique LetterGothic-Slanted
Eurostile LetterGothic-Bold
Eurostile-Bold LetterGothic-BoldSlanted
Internal Fonts List 391

11 Appendix
LubalinGraph-Book Univers-CondensedBold
LubalinGraph-BookOblique Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
LubalinGraph-Demi Univers-Extended
LubalinGraph-DemiOblique Univers-ExtendedObl
Marigold Univers-BoldExt
Monaco Univers-BoldExtObl
MonaLisa-Recut Wingdings-Regular
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic ZapfDingbats
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
NewYork
Optima
Optima-Italic
Optima-Bold
Optima-BoldItalic
Oxford
Palatino-Roman
Palatino-Italic
Palatino-Bold
Palatino-BoldItalic
StempelGaramond-Roman
StempelGaramond-Italic
StempelGaramond-Bold
StempelGaramond-BoldItalic
Symbol
Taffy
Times-Roman
Times-Italic
Times-Bold
Times-BoldItalic
TimesNewRomanPSMT
TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT
Univers-Light
Univers-LightOblique
Univers
Univers-Oblique
Univers-Bold
Univers-BoldOblique
Univers-Condensed
Univers-CondensedOblique
392 Internal Fonts List

INDEX
Numerics Disable/Enable ..........................................343
2-Sided Printing ................................228, 261 Discovery Settings ............................ 354, 363
Distinguish Thin Lines ............... 238, 286, 297
A Do not Print Blank Pages ..243, 286, 297, 317
A4 Tab .............................................224, 272 Document Monitoring Tabs .........................356
Add Device ......................................358, 359 Document Notification ................................347
All pages from ..................................285, 295 Draw as Outline ............................... 242, 269
Always Download needed fonts .................. 310 Draw Borders Around Pages ............. 231, 267
Angle ...............................................241, 269 Drawer .....................................................208
Annotate Font Keys ................................... 310 Drawers ...................................................246
AppleTalk Printing ..................................... 172 Duplicate ......................................... 237, 264
Automatic Duplexing Unit ...................208, 246
E
B Effect Tab .................................................222
Background Printing .................................. 308 Enable IPX/SPX Search .................... 354, 363
Basic Tab .........................................221, 224 Enable SNMP Communication ....................247
Billing Info ................................................ 284 Enable TCP/IP Search ...................... 355, 363
Binding ............................................294, 312 Event Notification ......................................366
Booklet Center Margin .............. 291, 303, 317 Events ......................................................345
Booklet Outer Margin ............... 292, 303, 317
F
Booklet Page Layout ................................. 317
Booklet Paper Size .................. 291, 303, 317 Features .....................................................16
Border .................................... 280, 293, 312 Filter ..........................................................18
Find All Devices on the Network ..................363
C Find TOSHIBA Devices ..............................363
Caption ............................................241, 269 Finisher ........................................... 208, 247
Center Watermark ..................................... 241 Finishing Tab ............................................221
Change Printer ......................................... 358 First page from ................................. 285, 296
Change Rate ............................................ 346 Font Manager .................................... 20, 386
Client CD-ROM ........................................... 17 Font Name ...................................... 241, 269
Client Utilities CD-ROM ............................... 18 Font Size ......................................... 241, 269
Collated .................................. 279, 292, 307 Fonts Tab .................................................222
Compress Bitmap ..................................... 244 Format ............................................ 281, 295
Configuration Settings ............................... 206 Format for ........................................ 277, 305
Configuration Tab .............................208, 222 Functions ...................................................16
Configure ................................................. 344
G
Connection Status ..................................... 357
Considerations .................................214, 276 General ....................................................307
Copies .................................... 279, 292, 307 General Errors ..........................................372
Copy Handling ......................... 227, 257, 258 GL-DocMon ................................................20
Cover Page Paper Source ......................... 309
H
Cover Page Type ...................................... 284
CUPS ...................................................... 187 Halftone ..........................237, 287, 297, 319
Custom .................................................... 272 Help .........................................................224
Hole Punch ............. 232, 288, 299, 313, 358
D Hole Punch Unit ............................... 208, 247
Default Menu Setting ................................. 242 How to Print ..............................................214
Department .............................................. 243
I
Department Code ............ 206, 213, 297, 316
Department Code (DC) .............................. 303 If there is PostScript error ...........................310
Department Code (DC) On ......................... 286 Image Quality Tab .....................................221
Destination ...................... 233, 288, 299, 312 Image Shift Width ............................. 225, 272
Destination Paper Size .............................. 283 In page of the order .......................... 230, 266
Devices ................................................... 354 Initial Values .............................................217
Direction of print ...............................230, 267 Insert Pages .................................... 235, 262
Install Software link ....................................127
INDEX 393
Installation Error ....................................... 371 Original Paper Size ................... 224, 258, 272
Installed ...........................................344, 348 Others Tab ...................................... 222, 242
Installer ...................................................... 17 Output Document Layout .................. 229, 265
Intent ....................................................... 309 Output Format ...........................................244
Interleave Pages ...............................237, 263 Overlay Image ................................. 239, 270
Internal Fonts ........................................... 390 Override Application Paper Settings ... 209, 248
Internet Connection ..................................... 24
IP Address .......................................353, 362 P
IP/IPX Address .................................348, 357 Page Order ...............................................283
IPP Printing ..........................................24, 92 Pages ..................................... 279, 292, 307
IPX Address .....................................353, 362 Pages per Sheet .............................. 279, 293
Item/Refresh Rate ..................................... 346 Pages per sheet ........................................311
Paper .......................................................306
J Paper Handling Tab .......................... 221, 233
Job Documentation ................................... 311 Paper Size ................................................278
Job Documentation Folder ......................... 311 Paper Source ................................... 226, 307
Paper Type ...............................................227
L PCL Fonts ................................................390
Layout Direction ................................280, 293 Physical Address .......................................358
Layout direction ........................................ 311 Point and Print ............................................71
Left to Right Page Layout ..................291, 303 Port ..........................................................348
Letter Tab ........................................224, 272 PostScript ...................................................17
Limitations ........................................214, 276 PostScript Errors .............................. 285, 295
Local Area Network ..................................... 22 PostScript Settings ....................................243
Local Discovery ........................................ 350 PPD .................................................. 18, 213
Location .................................. 353, 358, 362 Preferred Format .......................................310
lp command ............................................. 322 Preview window ........................................223
LPR Printing ................................ 23, 38, 168 Primary Tab Dialog ....................................225
lptap ........................................................ 322 Print Color ................................................308
Print Cover Page .............................. 284, 309
M Print Document .........................................282
Macintosh PPD ......................................... 140 Print Error Information ................................244
Manual Scale ...................................226, 259 Print in .....................................................308
Manual Selection ..............................353, 361 Print Job .......................................... 222, 316
Margin ..................................................... 230 Print Job Status Messages .........................370
Menu Bar Options ..................................... 355 Print Mode ....................................... 286, 296
Menu Tabs ............................................... 221 Print on Both Sides ........................... 294, 312
Method .................................................... 346 Print on First Page Only .................... 239, 268
Mirror ....................................................... 240 Print Options .............................................217
Model ...................................................... 358 Print over the document .............................240
Model Selection ................................208, 246 Print Paper Size ....................... 224, 258, 272
Print Queue ..............................................347
N Print to Overlay File .......................... 222, 254
Name ..................................... 353, 358, 362 printer description file .................................213
Negative/Positive ...................................... 240 Printer Drivers ................................ 17, 20, 21
Network Discovery .................................... 359 Printer Icon ...............................................357
Never generate Type 42 format .................. 310 Printer Image ............................................357
Normal Print ............................................. 222 Printer Information .....................................358
Notification .......................................344, 345 Printer Name ................................... 221, 348
Novell iPrint ........................................26, 126 Printer Profile ............................................309
Novell Printing ....................................25, 105 Printer Status ............................................347
Number of Copies ..................................... 227 Printers File Menu .....................................349
Number of pages per sheet ................230, 267 Priority .....................................................282
Private Print ..................................... 222, 250
O Profile ............................................. 219, 223
Orientation .............................. 227, 278, 306 Proof Print ....................................... 222, 252
394 INDEX
PS Fonts .................................................. 391 Use Custom Margin ...................................232
Use Front Cover ............................... 233, 262
R Use PostScript Passthrough .......................244
Raw TCP Printing .................................23, 38
Refresh Rates ..................................344, 346 V
Remaining from ................................285, 296 Version Information .......................... 243, 248
Restore Defaults ...............................223, 346
Reverse page order ..........................282, 283 W
Rotate 180 degrees ................................... 240 Watermark ....................................... 239, 268
Run Font Manager .................................... 246 Watermark Font ........................................318
Run the document monitor when starting Windows Watermark Gray Level ...............................318
344 Watermark Outline ....................................319
Watermark Position ...................................318
S Watermark Text ........................................318
Save as File .....................................281, 294 Watermark Text Angle ...............................318
Scale ...............................................278, 306 Watermark Text Size .................................318
Scheduled Print ................................222, 249 Watermarking ...........................................318
SMB Printing ........................................23, 64
Smoothing ....................... 238, 287, 297, 319 X
Solid ................................................241, 269 X Position .................................................241
Staple ...................................................... 231
Staple Down the Center .....................230, 266 Y
Start Discovery .................................351, 359 Y Position .................................................241
Startup ..................................................... 344
Status ..............................................356, 358
Status Bar ................................................ 356
Store to e-Filing ....................... 223, 255, 256
Style ........................................................ 241
Substitution Table Edit ............................... 245
System Requirements
Mac OS ................................................ 140
UNIX .................................................... 178
Windows ................................................. 21
T
Tab Extension ..................................225, 272
Tab Manufacturer .............................225, 272
TCP/IP ....................................................... 22
Toner Save .............242, 287, 298, 316, 319
TopAccess ...................... 127, 175, 202, 344
TopAccessDocMon .............. 20, 21, 342, 344
Transparency ...................................242, 269
Tray Switching ..................................285, 295
TrueType Options ..................................... 245
Two Sided Printing .................................... 280
U
Uninstalling .............................................. 129
Units ....................................... 225, 230, 241
Update ..................................................... 348
Update Automatically ........................211, 247
Update Now ............................................. 248
USB Connection ......................................... 22
USB Printing ........................................22, 27
Use Back Cover ................................234, 262
Use Black for All Texts .............................. 238
INDEX 395
396 INDEX
DP-3540/4540
DP-2050/2340/2840
OME050105C0
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
Printing Guide
2-17-2, HIGASHIGOTANDA, SHINAGAWA-KU, TOKYO, 141-8664, JAPAN
R05092093203-TTEC
©2005 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Ver03 2007-03

Estudio 452

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Estudio 452

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS

THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THIS PRODUCT INCLUDES NUMEROUS INDIVIDUAL

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 3

U.S. Government Restricted Rights

TOSHIBA TEC Corporation, 6-78, Minami-cho, Mishima-shi, Shizuoka-ken, 411-8520, Japan.

4 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT 5

About This Guide

Lineup of Our Manuals

User Functions Guide

Network Fax Guide

To read manuals in PDF (Portable Document Format) files

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

Indicates a procedure you should follow to ensure the optimal performance of

Features and Functions .............................................................................16

Chapter 2 Installing Client Software for Windows

About the Installation.................................................................................20

About the Installation...............................................................................140

Chapter 4 Installing Client Software for UNIX

Setting Up the UNIX Filters......................................................................178

Chapter 5 Printing from Windows

Before Using the Printer Driver...............................................................206

Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.4.x .....276

Chapter 7 Printing from UNIX

Printing from an Application ...................................................................322

Chapter 8 Other Printing Methods

FTP Printing ..............................................................................................338

Chapter 9 Monitoring Print Jobs

Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon ....................................342

When Printing cannot be Performed ......................................................370

Managing Fonts with Font Manager .......................................................386

This section describes the overview of the printing functions.

Features and Functions .........................................................................................16

Features and Functions

Extensive Client Platform Support

Various Port Options

Multiple Job Types

Professional Finishing Options

Sophisticated Document Layout and Assembly Options

Watermark and Image Overlay Support

16 Features and Functions

Client Software Installer

PCL6 Printer Drivers

PS3 Printer Drivers (PostScript)

Printer Driver Setup files (Zip Compressed)

About the Client CD-ROM 17

Macintosh PPD files

SCO UNIX Filter

18 About the Client CD-ROM

About the Installation .............................................................................................20

Installing Client Software for USB Printing ..........................................................27

Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing ..........................................38

Installing Client Software for SMB Printing..........................................................64

Installing Client Software for IPP Printing ............................................................92

Installing Client Software for Novell Printing .....................................................105

Installing Client Software for Web Services Print..............................................120

Repairing Client Software ....................................................................................137

About the Installation

Planning for Installation

Before Installing Client Software

— When Same Printer Drivers Have Been Installed Previously

— When GL-DocMon Has Been Installed Previously